JP7621080B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that execute a big prize game in which a big prize lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting hole, and if a big prize is won in the big prize lottery, the big prize opening is opened. In such gaming machines, variable information is determined based on the result of the big prize lottery, and a variable presentation is executed that suggests the likelihood of winning a big prize based on the variable information.

Patent documents 1 and 2 propose a gaming machine in which a non-electrically operated area is provided in a variable start opening, known as an electric chute, and a non-electric prize opening is opened by a gaming ball that enters the variable start opening.

JP 2014-121399 A JP 2017-86699 A

As mentioned above, gaming machines with a variety of playability have been proposed, but there is a demand for the development of gaming machines that can increase the interest of players by providing even more novel playability.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming by providing new gameplay features.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a start port including at least a variable start port is provided in a gaming area, and a normal state and a specific state in which it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the variable start port than in the normal state are provided as gaming states, and the gaming machine is equipped with: a judgment means for making a win/loss judgment based on the entry of the gaming ball into the start port; an advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the win/loss judgment resulting in a win judgment; a state setting means for setting the gaming state after the advantageous game to the specific state; an opening/closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable start port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the specific state; a prize port that is provided in the gaming area so as to be able to be opened and closed and that can be opened by a gaming ball that has entered the variable start port; a payout control means for paying out prize balls based on the entry of the gaming ball into the prize port; and a signal output means for outputting a jackpot signal to the outside from during the advantageous game to while the prize port is open after the advantageous game has ended.

The present invention can increase the interest of the game by providing new gameplay features.

1 is an oblique view of a gaming machine showing the door in the simultaneous rotation reference example in an open state. FIG. 2 is a front view of a gaming machine relating to a simultaneous rotation reference example. A diagram explaining the second large prize slot in the simultaneous spinning reference example. A block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is an address map of a memory area used by a main CPU according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. This is a diagram explaining the random number judgment table for determining a jackpot at low probability in the simultaneous spin reference example. This is a diagram explaining a random number judgment table for determining a jackpot at high probability in a simultaneous spin reference example. A diagram explaining a winning pattern random number determination table and a small winning pattern random number determination table for a simultaneous spin reference example. 1A is a diagram explaining a fluctuation pattern random number judgment table for a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a fluctuation time determination table for a simultaneous rotation reference example. A diagram explaining the game state and variable time for the simultaneous spin reference example. This is the first diagram explaining the special electric role operation ram set table for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is the second diagram explaining the special electric feature operation ram set table for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A diagram explaining a game status setting table for a simultaneous rotation reference example. A diagram explaining a random number judgment table for determining a win in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 1A is a diagram explaining a normal pattern change time data table for a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining an opening/closing control pattern table for a simultaneous rotation reference example. A figure explaining the transition of game states in accordance with the original gameplay of the simultaneous spin reference example. A figure explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not played properly in the simultaneous spin reference example. A figure explaining the gaming machine status flag for the simultaneous spin reference example. 11 is a first flowchart illustrating a CPU initialization process in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a second flowchart illustrating the CPU initialization process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-command group set process in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a save process during power interruption in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in a main control board in a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the first starting port passing process in the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the second starting port passing process in the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the special pattern random number acquisition process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition time performance determination process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening passing processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A figure explaining the special game management phase related to the simultaneous spin reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special game management processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern change processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a first flowchart explaining the special pattern change waiting process in the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a second flowchart explaining the special pattern change waiting process in the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern winning determination process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern variable number determination process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the number of times cutoff management processing in the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the processing during special pattern changes on the main control board in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern stop pattern display processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the forced pattern stop processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the processing before opening the large prize opening in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening control process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening closure activation process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A diagram explaining the normal game management phase related to the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal game management processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the processing during normal pattern fluctuation in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the normal pattern stop pattern display processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the processing before opening of the winning opening of a normal electric device in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the control processing for opening the winning opening of a normal electric device in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric device winning opening closure validity processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick winning slot end wait processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable presentation of a no-reach variable pattern related to a reference presentation example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation presentation related to a presentation reference example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the development reach change pattern when a miss occurs in accordance with a reference example of the performance. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a change presentation of a development reach change pattern at the time of a jackpot, which is related to a reference presentation example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable presentation when the reach development presentation relating to the presentation reference example is executed twice. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation presentation relating to a presentation reference example. FIG. A figure explaining a variable performance decision table related to a performance reference example. A figure explaining an example of a hold display presentation related to a reference presentation example. 1A is a diagram explaining a final hold display pattern determination table relating to a reference example of presentation, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a previous hold display pattern determination table relating to a reference example of presentation. 13 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining sub-timer interrupt processing in a sub-control board for a reference example of a performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining the pre-reading designation command reception processing in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining the variable pattern command receiving processing in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment. A partially enlarged view of the second play area. A diagram explaining the internal structure of the big prize opening. A diagram explaining the first non-electric prize-winning device and the second non-electric prize-winning device. This is the first diagram explaining the operation of the first non-electric prize-winning device and the second non-electric prize-winning device. A second diagram explaining the operation of the first non-electric prize-winning device and the second non-electric prize-winning device. 2 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game in the embodiment. FIG. A diagram explaining a random number judgment table for determining a jackpot at low probability in an embodiment. A diagram explaining a random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot in an embodiment. A diagram explaining a winning pattern random number determination table in the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operation ram set table according to the embodiment. A diagram explaining the opening and closing manner of the large prize opening and the opening and closing manner of the special prize area by the movable member. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game status setting table according to the embodiment. A figure explaining a winning determination random number judgment table in the embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining a normal pattern change time data table according to an embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a game state according to an embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating the transition of game states in accordance with the original gameplay characteristics of the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of the 10R special bonus game and non-electric bonus period in the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the process of passing through the variable probability area in the main control board according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern variable number determination process in the main control board in the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a number-of-times cutoff management process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process in a main control board according to an embodiment. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait processing in the main control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board in the embodiment. A flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board in the embodiment. A flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick winning port end wait processing in the main control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the payout control management processing in the main control board in the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the first performance system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the first performance system. A figure explaining another example of the performance content of the first performance system. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the second production system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the second performance system. 13A is a diagram for explaining the third production system, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining the fourth production system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the third performance system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the fourth performance system. 13A is a diagram explaining the fifth production system, and FIG. 13B is a diagram explaining the sixth production system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the fifth performance system. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance content of the sixth performance system. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-timer interrupt process in a sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the variable pattern command receiving process in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern designation command receiving processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an opening designation command receiving process in a sub-control board in the embodiment. A flowchart explaining the process of receiving a command specifying the opening of the large prize opening in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the normal power release designation command receiving process in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the normal power shutoff designation command receiving process in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating additional processing in a sub-control board in the embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a configuration of an operating handle according to a first modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the dimensional relationship of an operating handle according to a first modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a maximum rotation position of an operating handle according to a first modified example. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a first application example of an operating handle. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a second application example of the operating handle. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game board according to a second modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outer rail before being attached to a rail base in accordance with a second modified example. FIG. 13 is an oblique view of a disassembled game board, outer rail, and rail base according to a second modified example. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing cross section A in FIG. 124 for a game board according to a second modified example. A diagram to explain the position of the guide portion when the outer rail of the second modified example is attached to the game board.

The following describes in detail preferred embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific values shown in the embodiments are merely examples to facilitate understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In this specification and drawings, elements that have substantially the same functions and configurations are given the same reference numerals to avoid duplicated explanations, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are not shown.

To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a simultaneous rotation reference example, the mechanical and electrical configurations of the so-called simultaneous rotation machine and the specific processing on each board are explained. Then, as a performance reference example, specific performances that can be executed on the simultaneous rotation machine and specific processing related to the performances are explained. After that, as an embodiment of the present invention, configurations that differ from each of the reference examples are specifically explained.

<Simultaneous rotation example>
1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, showing a state in which the door is open. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 having an enclosed space formed by four sides assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, a middle frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed, and a front frame 106 attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed.

The middle frame 104, like the outer frame 102, has four sides arranged in a roughly rectangular shape to form an enclosed space, and the game board 108 is held in this enclosed space. The front frame 106 also holds a glass or resin transparent plate 110. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed against the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110 face each other roughly parallel, maintaining a predetermined distance between them, and the game board 108 can be seen through the transparent plate 110 from the front side of the gaming machine 100.

Figure 2 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 relating to a simultaneous rotation reference example. As shown in this figure, an operating handle 112 that protrudes from the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the bottom of the front frame 106. This operating handle 112 is provided so that it can be rotated by the player, and when the player rotates the operating handle 112 to perform a firing operation, a gaming ball is fired by a firing mechanism (not shown) with a strength according to the rotation angle of the operating handle 112. The gaming ball fired in this way rises between rails 114a, 114b provided on the gaming board 108 and is guided to the playing area 116.

The play area 116 is a space formed between the play board 108 and the transparent plate 110, and is an area in which the play balls can flow down or roll. The play board 108 is provided with numerous nails and windmills (not shown), and the play balls guided to the play area 116 collide with the nails and windmills, causing them to flow down and roll in irregular directions.

The play area 116 has a first play area 116a and a second play area 116b, in which the degree of entry of the play balls differs according to the launch strength of the launch mechanism, allowing the player to hit different game balls. The first play area 116a is located on the left side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second play area 116b is located on the right side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the play area 116, game balls launched by the launch mechanism with a launch strength less than a predetermined strength will enter the first play area 116a, and game balls launched with a launch strength equal to or greater than the predetermined strength will enter the second play area 116b.

The game area 116 is also provided with a general prize entry port 118 through which game balls can enter, a first fixed start port 120A, a first variable start port 120B, a second start port 122, and a general action port 125. When a game ball enters the general prize entry port 118, the first fixed start port 120A, the first variable start port 120B, the second start port 122, or the general action port 125, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. In the following, the first fixed start port 120A and the first variable start port 120B are collectively referred to as the first start port 120.

As will be described in more detail later, a first starting area is provided within the first starting hole 120, and a second starting area is provided within the second starting hole 122. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122 and enters the first starting area or the second starting area, a lottery is held to determine one of a number of special patterns that have been set up in advance. Each special pattern is associated with the possibility of executing a big prize game or a small prize game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, the player not only acquires a predetermined prize ball, but also acquires the opportunity to acquire the right to receive various game benefits.

The first fixed starting port 120A, the second starting port 122 and the normal operating port 125 are configured as fixed starting ports that are always open to allow game balls to enter. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and is configured as a variable starting port in which the ease with which game balls can enter the first variable starting port 120B changes depending on the state of this movable piece 120b. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, and during this time it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

In response to this, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or enters the normal symbol operation port 125, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held, and if a winning symbol is selected in this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to an open state for a predetermined time. When the movable piece 120b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the first variable start port 120B. In this way, the movable piece 120b functions as a movable member (start variable winning device) that transitions between an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B, and a closed state that makes it more difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B than in the open state.

The first fixed starting port 120A is located at a position where only game balls flowing down the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are located at a position where only game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. The first fixed starting port 120A may be used to allow game balls flowing down the second game area 116b to enter, but in this case, it is desirable to place it at a position where game balls flowing down the first game area 116a can enter more easily than game balls flowing down the second game area 116b.

Similarly, the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 may be entered by game balls flowing down the first game area 116a, but in this case, it is desirable to arrange them in a position where game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter more easily than game balls flowing down the first game area 116a. In any case, it is desirable that the first fixed starting port 120A is arranged in a position where at least game balls flowing down the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are arranged in a position where at least game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter.

Furthermore, the second game area 116b is provided with a first large prize opening 126 and a second large prize opening 128. The first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are positioned so that only game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter the opening. However, the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 may be positioned so that any game balls flowing down the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b can enter the opening.

The first large prize opening 126 is provided with an opening/closing door 126b that can be opened and closed. Normally, the opening/closing door 126b closes the first large prize opening 126, making it impossible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 126. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 126b is closed, it is flush with the surface of the game board 108, and game balls flow down in front of the first large prize opening 126. In contrast, when the aforementioned big prize game is played, the opening/closing door 126b opens and functions as a tray that guides game balls to the first large prize opening 126, making it possible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 126. Then, when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 126, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player.

The second large prize opening 128 is provided below the first large prize opening 126 in the second game area 116b. The second large prize opening 128 is equipped with a movable piece 128b, which is normally maintained in a closed state. In contrast, when a small prize game described below is played, the movable piece 128b is controlled to an open state, allowing a game ball to enter the second large prize opening 128. In the following, the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the large prize openings.

Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating the second large prize opening 128 in the simultaneous spin reference example. A structure 129 protruding from the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 129 is surrounded on all four sides in the left-right and front-back directions of the gaming machine 100, as well as on the bottom side, and has an opening formed at the top. The opening formed at the top of this structure 129 becomes the second large prize opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided at the top of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in Figure 3(a), the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state that closes the second large prize opening 128.

The movable piece 128b protrudes into the game area 116 where the game balls roll and flow down, facing above the game machine 100. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state, the game balls flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) fall onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the structure 129 has a base that is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction, and the right side of the game machine 100 is slightly longer in the height direction than the left side. Therefore, the second large winning opening 128 is slightly lower on the left side of the game machine 100 than the right side, and the movable piece 128b maintained in a closed state is inclined so that the left side of the game machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, the game ball that falls onto the movable piece 128b will roll slowly from right to left on the movable piece 128b, as shown by the arrow in Figure 3 (a).

When a small win game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b transitions to an open state that opens the second large winning opening 128. Here, the movable piece 128b transitions from a closed state to an open state by sliding toward the rear side of the game board 108, as shown in FIG. 3(b). As a result, when transitioning from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls under its own weight into the second large winning opening 128.

In this way, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly tilted to ensure a long time for the game balls to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, the movable piece 128b transitions from a closed state to an open state, leading the game balls rolling on the movable piece 128b into the second large winning opening 128. With the above configuration, even if the time for which the movable piece 128b is kept in the open state is set to be short, a predetermined number of game balls can be led into the second large winning opening 128. In other words, the time for which the movable piece 128b is kept in the open state, which is necessary to allow a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second large winning opening 128, can be shortened. In addition, a hole that communicates with the back side of the game board 108 is formed on the back side of the structure 129, and the game balls that enter the second large winning opening 128 are discharged to the back side of the game board 108. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128, a certain number of prize balls are paid out to the player.

Here, the configuration of the second large winning opening 128 has been described, but the first variable starting opening 120B has the same configuration as the second large winning opening 128. That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting opening 120B protrudes from the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. And, when the movable piece 120b is in the open state, the movable piece 120b slides to the rear side of the game board 108, and the game ball can enter the first variable starting opening 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the right side of the movable piece 128b is higher than the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100, whereas the left side of the movable piece 120b is higher than the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100.

Here, the board configuration of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous spin reference example, the second start port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the top of the second game area 116b. All game balls guided to the second game area 116b either enter the second start port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous spin reference example, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters the second start port 122.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is held to determine whether a big prize game or a small prize game will be played. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is held to determine whether the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) will be opened.

Directly below the second starting hole 122 and the gate 124 is a first large prize opening 126. When the first large prize opening 126 is open, it is positioned so that all game balls that pass through the gate 124 and flow downward enter the first large prize opening 126. In the simultaneous spin reference example, the first large prize opening 126 is only opened during the big prize game. In other words, the first large prize opening 126 can be said to be a large prize opening exclusively for the big prize game. When a game ball enters the first large prize opening 126 during the big prize game, a predetermined number of game balls (2 or more in number, 15 in this case) are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters.

A first variable start opening 120B is provided below the first large prize opening 126. In addition, an outlet 131 is provided between the first large prize opening 126 and the first variable start opening 120B. The outlet 131 is the entrance to a passage for discharging game balls from the game area 116, and even if a game ball enters the outlet 131, no prize balls will be paid out.

In the second game area 116b, nails are arranged so that most (e.g., 90% or more) of the game balls that flow down below the first large winning opening 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. In addition, these nails guide a portion (e.g., 1% to 10%) of the game balls that flow down below the first large winning opening 126 to the outlet 131.

When the first variable start opening 120B is in a closed state, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. If the movable piece 120b opens while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable start opening 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable start opening 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not a big prize game or a small prize game will be played.

Gaming balls that do not enter the first variable start opening 120B fall from above the movable piece 120b to the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100. Below the first variable start opening 120B, the second large prize opening 128 is provided, and most of the gaming balls that fall from above the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second large prize opening 128. Due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b, the gaming balls on the movable piece 128b slowly roll from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, which will be described in more detail later, the second large prize opening 128 is only opened during small prize play. In other words, the second large prize opening 128 can be said to be a large prize opening exclusively for small prize play. When the movable piece 128b opens while a game ball is rolling on it, all game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second large prize opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128 during a small prize play, a predetermined number of game balls (2 or more in number, 15 in this case) are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters.

The normal ball operation port 125 is provided to the lower left of the second large winning port 128. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all game balls that fall downward from the top of the second large winning port 128 enter the normal ball operation port 125. In the simultaneous spin reference example, the normal ball operation port 125 constitutes a "specific winning port" from which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters. In addition, when a game ball enters the normal ball operation port 125, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the first variable start port 120B (movable piece 120b) is opened, just as when the game ball passes through the gate 124.

At the bottom of the game area 116, there is provided an outlet 130 that discharges game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, the second starting hole 122, the general operation hole 125, or the big winning hole from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The gaming machine 100 is equipped with a performance display device 200 consisting of a liquid crystal display device, a performance prop device 202 consisting of a movable device, a performance lighting device 204 consisting of lamps that can be controlled to various lighting modes and emission colors, a sound output device 206 consisting of a speaker, and a performance operation device 208 that accepts operations by the player, as performance devices that perform performances while the game is in progress.

The effect display device 200 is equipped with a main effect display section 200a consisting of an image display section that displays images, and this main effect display section 200a is arranged in the approximate center of the game board 108 so that it can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine 100. As shown in the figure, this main effect display section 200a executes various effects, such as the display of three effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in a variable manner.

The performance device 202 is located in front of the main performance display unit 200a, and is usually separated into multiple components and stored at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108 so that it cannot be seen by the player. Then, when the actuator is driven to move each component to a movable position in front of the main performance display unit 200a during the changing display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, the components combine in front of the main performance display unit 200a, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a big win.

The lighting device 204 is provided on the prop device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is controlled to light up in various ways in accordance with the images displayed on the main display unit 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the top of the front frame 106 or at the bottom of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front of the gaming machine 100 in accordance with the images displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

The effect operation device 208 is composed of buttons that are pressed by the player, and is located in approximately the center of the gaming machine 100 in the width direction, and below the transparent plate 110. This effect operation device 208 is activated in accordance with the images displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when a player's operation is received within the effective operation time, various effects are executed according to the operation.

The reference symbol 132 in the figure indicates an upper tray to which prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and gaming balls loaned from the gaming ball loaning device are guided, and when this upper tray 132 is full of gaming balls, the gaming balls are guided to the lower tray 134. A ball ejection hole (not shown) is formed in the bottom surface of this lower tray 134 for ejecting gaming balls from the lower tray 134. This ball ejection hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but by pressing down on the ball ejection knob 134a, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball ejection knob 134a, making it possible to eject gaming balls from the ball ejection hole to below the lower tray 134.

The game board 108 is provided with a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reserved display 164, a second special symbol reserved display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a normal symbol reserved display 170, and a right hit notification display 172, located outside the game area 116 and in a position visible to the player. Each of these displays 160-172 is a device for displaying various game-related situations, and will be described in detail below.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game in the simultaneous spin reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. This main control board 300 is equipped with a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 300b and performs calculations based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or sends commands to other boards depending on the results of the calculations. The main RAM 300c functions as a work area for data during the calculations of the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s for detecting when a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, a first fixed starting hole detection switch 120As for detecting when a game ball has entered the first fixed starting hole 120A, a first variable starting hole detection switch 120Bs for detecting when a game ball has entered the first variable starting hole 120B, a second starting hole detection switch 122s for detecting when a game ball has entered the second starting hole 122, and a second starting hole detection switch 122s for detecting when a game ball has passed through the gate 124. A gate detection switch 124s that detects when a ball has passed the gate, a normal operation port detection switch 125s that detects when a game ball has entered the normal operation port 125, a first large prize opening detection switch 126s that detects when a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 126, and a second large prize opening detection switch 128s that detects when a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 128 are connected, and detection signals are input from each of these detection switches to the main control board 300.

The main control board 300 is also connected to a normal electric device solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable start opening 120B, a first large prize opening solenoid 126c that operates the opening and closing door 126b that opens and closes the first large prize opening 126, and a second large prize opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large prize opening 128. The main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the first variable start opening 120B, the first large prize opening 126, and the second large prize opening 128.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved display 164, the second special pattern reserved display 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved display 170, and the right hit notification display 172 are connected to the main control board 300, and the display of each of these displays is controlled by the main control board 300.

Furthermore, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible with a dedicated key. When the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting value can be changed and confirmed. As will be described in detail later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example, one of six setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and the game progresses according to the stored registered setting value. Note that, although it is assumed here that there are six setting values, there may be only two setting values, a high setting and a low setting, or there may be multiple other settings. Furthermore, a setting value is not essential, and the degree of advantage does not have to be changed.

A RAM clear button is provided on the back of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and pressing this RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s to the main control board 300. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

In addition, a performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays the registered setting values and base ratios on the performance display monitor 184.

The gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spin reference example is broadly divided into special games that are started mainly by a game ball entering the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and normal games that are started by a game ball passing through the gate 124 or entering the normal operation port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing the special games and normal games, as well as data and tables required for various games.

The main control board 300 is also connected to a payout control board 310 and a sub-control board 330. The payout control board 310 controls the launching of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 also has a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that it can communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to this payout control board 310, and various information on the progress of the game output from the main control board 300 is output to the hall computer of the gaming facility via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage section to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on a payout number designation command sent from the main control board 300 to control it so that a specified number of prize balls are paid out to the player. At this time, the number of paid out game balls is detected by a payout ball counting switch 316s, and it is possible to know whether the prize balls to be paid out have been paid out to the player.

In addition, a tray full detection switch 318s that detects the full state of the lower tray 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. This tray full detection switch 318s is provided in a passage that guides the game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower tray 134, and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310.

When the lower tray 134 is filled to capacity with more than a predetermined amount of game balls, game balls become trapped in the passageway leading to the lower tray 134, and game ball detection signals are continuously input from the full tray detection switch 318s to the payout control board 310. If the game ball detection signals are continuously input for a predetermined period of time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full, and sends a full tray command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signals stops after sending the full tray command, it determines that the full tray state has been released, and sends a full tray release command to the main control board 300.

The payout control board 310 is also provided with a launch control circuit 320 that controls the launch of game balls. The payout control board 310 is connected to a touch sensor 112s that is provided on the operating handle 112 and detects when the player touches the operating handle 112, and an operating volume 112a that detects the operating angle of the operating handle 112. When signals are input from the touch sensor 112s and the operating volume 112a, the launch control circuit 320 controls the energization of a launch solenoid 112c provided on the game ball launching device to launch the game balls.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each presentation during play, standby, etc. This sub-control board 330 is equipped with a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that it can communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. The sub-CPU 330a reads out the programs stored in the sub-ROM 330b and performs calculation processing based on commands sent from the main control board 300 and input signals from a timer, and also controls the execution of the presentation. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing by the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub-control board 330, the sub-CPU 330a, sub-ROM 330b, and sub-RAM 330c work together to function as a sub-main, image control unit, prop control unit, lighting control unit, and sound control unit. The sub-main determines the content of the performance to be executed in response to various input commands, and manages and coordinates the execution of the performance. The image control unit performs image display control to display images on the main performance display unit 200a. The sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as designs, backgrounds, and subtitles to be displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, and the image control unit reads the image data from the sub-ROM 330b to a VRAM (not shown) to control the image display on the main performance display unit 200a.

The prop control unit drives actuators in accordance with the performance management by the sub-main, and controls the movement of the prop device 202. The lighting control unit controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 204. The audio control unit controls the audio output to output audio from the audio output device 206. Sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data, such as audio and music, that is output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from sub-ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined performance when an operation detection signal is input from the performance operation device detection switch 208s, which detects that the performance operation device 208 has been pressed or rotated.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. The power supply board is also provided with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor.

Figure 5 is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU 300a in the simultaneous rotation reference example. Note that in Figure 5, addresses are shown in hexadecimal, with "H" indicating hexadecimal. As shown in Figure 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes the memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and the memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b is divided into a used area (0000H to 1A7AH) that stores programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and a non-used area (2000H to 2BFFH) that stores programs and data for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processes for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184).

The used area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H-0A89H) in which programs for controlling the progress of the game are stored, an unused area (0A8AH-0FFFH), and a data area (1000H-1A7AH) in which data other than programs are stored. Note that the used area does not necessarily have to include the unused area (0A8AH-0FFFH).

The unused area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (2000H to 27FFH) that stores programs for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184, and a data area (2800H to 2BFFH) that stores data other than these programs.

In addition to the used area and unused area, the memory area of main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH-1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H-1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as the program title and version is stored, an unused area (1F00H-1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H-2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H-2FFFH) in which information necessary for main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is divided into a used area (F000H to F1FFH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and a non-used area (F210H to F228H) that is an area other than the used area and is temporarily used when a program for processing tests stipulated by the gaming machine regulations or processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is being executed.

The used area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H-F12AH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, an unused area (F12BH-F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H-F1FFH) where data is temporarily saved while a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed. Note that the used area does not have to include the unused area (F12BH-F1D7H).

The unused area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F210H to F21FH) that is temporarily used when programs are being executed for processing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184, and a stack area (F220H to F228H) that temporarily stores data when these programs are being executed.

In addition to the used area and unused area, the memory area of main RAM 300c also has an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH).

In this way, main ROM 300b and main RAM 300c are provided with separate areas: a used area used to control the progress of the game, and a non-used area used to execute processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184.

The main RAM 300c has a 16-byte unused area (F200H-F20FH) between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H-F20FH) is set as a boundary area that separates the used area and the unused area, making the boundary between the used area and the unused area clear, preventing the unused area from being used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and preventing the used area from being used when a program for processing tests defined by the gaming machine regulations or processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed.

The unused area between the used area and the unused area only needs to be at least 1 byte, and from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable that it be 4 bytes or more, and more preferably set to 16 bytes or more. Furthermore, writing and reading of data into the unused area is prohibited, but from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it may be cleared at a specified time.

Next, we will explain how to play the simultaneous spin reference example gaming machine 100, along with the various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spin reference example has two types of games, special game and normal game, progressing in parallel. The special game progresses in either a low probability game state or a high probability game state, while the normal game progresses in either a non-time-saving game state, a medium time-saving game state, or a time-saving game state.

Details of each game state will be described later, but the low probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to play the big prize game in which the big prize opening is opened is set low, and the high probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to play the big prize game is set high. In addition, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is less likely to be in the open state and the game ball is less likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B, and the intermediate time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than the non-time-saving game state and the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B. In addition, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is even more likely to be in the open state than the intermediate time-saving game state and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B. In addition, in the time-saving play state, if game balls continue to be shot toward the second play area 116b during play, the game balls are set to decrease slightly or not at all.

As described above, since the special game and the normal game proceed simultaneously in parallel, in the simultaneous spin reference example, the game state is a combination of a low probability game state or a high probability game state with either a non-time-saving game state, a medium time-saving game state, or a time-saving game state. In the following, for ease of understanding, the game states related to the special game, i.e., the low probability game state and the high probability game state, may be referred to as special game states, and the game states related to the normal game, i.e., the non-time-saving game state, the medium time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, may be referred to as normal game states. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the low probability game state and the non-time-saving game state.

When a player operates the operating handle 112 to launch a game ball into the game area 116, and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as the "big prize lottery") is held to determine whether or not the player will be awarded a game profit. In this big prize lottery, if a big win is won, a big prize opening is opened and a big prize game is executed in which the game ball can enter the big prize opening, and the game state after the big prize game ends is set to one of the game states described above. The big prize lottery method is explained below.

As will be described in more detail later, when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, various random number values related to the big prize lottery (jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, variable pattern random number) are obtained, and each of these random number values is stored in the special symbol reserve memory area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reserve, and the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 are collectively referred to as special 2 reserve.

The special chart reservation memory area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special chart reservation memory area and a second special chart reservation memory area. The first special chart reservation memory area and the second special chart reservation memory area each have four memory sections (first to fourth memory sections). When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order starting from the first memory section of the first special chart reservation memory area, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in order starting from the first memory section of the second special chart reservation memory area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, if no reservation is stored in any of the first to fourth memory sections of the first special chart reservation memory area, a special 1 reservation is stored in the first memory section. Also, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while a special 1 reservation is stored in the first to third memory sections, the special 1 reservation is stored in the fourth memory section. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, similar to the above, a special 2 reservation is stored in the memory section with the smallest number (ordinal number) among the first to fourth memory sections of the second special chart reservation memory area where a special 2 reservation is not stored.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special chart reservation memory area and the second special chart reservation memory area are each set to four. Therefore, for example, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special chart reservation memory area when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, no new special 1 reservations will be stored by the game ball entering the first starting hole 120. Similarly, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special chart reservation memory area when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, no new special 2 reservations will be stored by the game ball entering the second starting hole 122.

Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table for a simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the big win lottery starts, that is, according to the game state when the jackpot determination is made, a jackpot determination random number judgment table is selected, and the big win lottery is performed using the selected jackpot determination random number judgment table and the obtained jackpot determination random number.

When starting the big prize lottery for special 1 reserve and special 2 reserve in a low probability game state, the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table is referenced. Here, in the simultaneous spin reference example, six setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table is provided for each setting value. During play, the setting value is set to one of the six levels, and the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table corresponding to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer).

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in FIG. 6 (a). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10218, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/300.6, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 2 (registered setting value = 2), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table b shown in FIG. 6 (b). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table b, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10225, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/291.2, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 3 (registered setting value = 3), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table c shown in Figure 6 (c). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table c, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10232, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/282.4, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 4 (registered setting value = 4), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table d shown in FIG. 6 (d). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table d, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10239, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/274.2, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value = 5), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table e shown in FIG. 6 (e). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table e, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10246, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/266.4, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 6 (registered setting value = 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table f shown in Figure 6 (f). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table f, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10253, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/259.0, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

Figure 7 is a diagram explaining the random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot in the simultaneous spin reference example. When starting a lottery for a big prize for special 1 reserve and special 2 reserve in a high probability game state, the random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot is referenced. The random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot is also set for each setting value, just like the random number judgment table for determining a low probability jackpot.

When the game is in a high probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the high probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in FIG. 7 (a). According to this high probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10620, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/105.7, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

Similarly, when the game is in a high probability game state and the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f shown in Figures 7 (b) to (f). According to these high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, a jackpot is judged to have occurred when the jackpot determination random number is the value shown. Therefore, when the setting value is 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/102.4 to 1/91.0, respectively, and the small jackpot probability is approximately 1/3.45.

As described above, the big prize lottery is held according to the registered setting value. At this time, the probability of winning a big prize differs according to the registered setting value, and it is easier to win a big prize when the registered setting value is large than when it is small. Note that here, even if the registered setting value differs, the probability of winning a small prize does not change, but the probability of winning a small prize may be different for each registered setting value. Also, a small prize is not required, and only either a big prize or a miss may be determined in the big prize lottery.

In addition, here, the probability of winning a jackpot in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state is set to differ depending on the registered setting value, but it is also possible to set it so that only the probability of winning a jackpot in either the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state differs depending on the registered setting value.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the winning symbol random number determination table and the small winning symbol random number determination table for the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one winning symbol random number within the range of 0 to 99 is obtained. Then, when a "big win" determination result is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of special symbol is determined based on the obtained winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if the "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the winning pattern random number judgment table a for special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(a), if the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the winning pattern random number judgment table b for special 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(b), if the "small win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the small win pattern random number judgment table a for special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(c), and if the "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the small win pattern random number judgment table b for special 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(d). In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the big win is obtained, is called the big win pattern, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the small win is obtained is called the small win pattern, and the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the loss is obtained is called the loss pattern.

According to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b), a big winning symbol (special symbols A to J) is determined as a special symbol according to the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, as shown in the figure. Also, according to the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(c) and the special 2 small winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(d), a small winning symbol (special symbols Z1 to Z6) is determined as a special symbol according to the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, as shown in the figure.

When the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss", if the result is derived by special 1 reservation, special pattern X is determined as the missing pattern without drawing a lottery, and when the result is derived by special 2 reservation, special pattern Y is determined as the missing pattern without drawing a lottery. In other words, the winning pattern random number determination table is referenced only when the result of the big prize lottery is a "big prize", and is not referenced when the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss" or a "small prize". In addition, the small prize pattern random number determination table is referenced only when the result of the big prize lottery is a "small prize", and is not referenced when the result of the big prize lottery is a "big prize" or a "miss". In addition, the special patterns Z1 to Z6, which are the small prize patterns, are collectively referred to simply as special pattern Z.

9(a) is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern random number judgment table relating to the simultaneous spin reference example, and FIG. 9(b) is a diagram for explaining a variation time determination table relating to the simultaneous spin reference example. Note that a plurality of variation pattern random number judgment tables are provided for each reserved type, result of the big role lottery (special symbol type), game state, number of variations, and even reserved number, but here, an arbitrary variation pattern random number judgment table x will be explained. When the type of special symbol is determined as described above, one of the variation pattern numbers is determined based on the variation pattern random number judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(a) and the variation pattern random number in the range of 0 to 238 obtained when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122. Each of these variation pattern numbers is associated with a variation time as shown in FIG. 9(b). This variation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

As will be described in more detail below, when a special pattern is determined based on the special 1 reservation and the change pattern number, i.e., the change time, the first special pattern display 160 displays a changing pattern for the determined change time, and when the change time has elapsed, the determined special pattern is displayed stationary on the first special pattern display 160. When a special pattern is determined based on the special 2 reservation and the change pattern number, i.e., the change time, the second special pattern display 162 displays a changing pattern for the determined change time, and when the change time has elapsed, the determined special pattern is displayed stationary on the second special pattern display 162. At this time, when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, a loss is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and the big role lottery based on the next special 1 reservation can be executed, and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a loss is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and the big role lottery based on the next special 2 reservation can be executed. On the other hand, when a big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, a big win is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and a big role game is executed, and when a small win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a small win is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and a small win game is executed.

In this way, the fluctuation time specifies the time for the fluctuation display of the patterns on the first special pattern display 160 or the second special pattern display 162, in other words, the time until the result of the big prize lottery is determined, and multiple fluctuation pattern random number determination tables for determining this fluctuation time are provided according to the reserved type, the result of the big prize lottery (special pattern type), game status, etc. As a result, even if the value of the acquired fluctuation pattern random number is the same, a different fluctuation pattern number, i.e., fluctuation time, will be determined depending on the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

When the variation pattern number is determined in the above manner, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number is sent to the sub-control board 330. The sub-control board 330 determines the mode of variation presentation based on the received variation pattern command, but the details are omitted here.

Figure 10 is a diagram explaining the game states and variable times in the simultaneous spin reference example. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined to form one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As already explained, there are two types of special game states, a low probability game state and a high probability game state, which differ in the probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, there are three types of normal game states, a non-time-saving game state, a medium time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state, which differ in the ease (ball-scoring frequency) of the game ball entering the first variable start hole 120B.

Here, in normal play, the ease with which a game ball can enter the first variable start port 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, fluctuation time, and opening time. As will be described in detail later, in normal play, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal play operation port 125, a normal play reserve is stored. Then, based on the stored normal play reserve, a normal play lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 120b. The result of this normal play lottery is determined after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When a win is determined as a result of the normal play lottery, the movable piece 120b is opened. At this time, the winning probability in the normal play lottery, the fluctuation time, and the opening time when opening the movable piece 120b are each set for each normal play state.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), six types of game states are provided by combining special game states and normal game states. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal drawing is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous spin reference example, a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state is called a normal state.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, the game state may be set to a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the game state that combines these two is called the most advantageous state. This most advantageous state is the most advantageous of the six game states, and is set so that if the game balls are fired appropriately, the number of game balls will gradually increase during play, even if a jackpot is not won.

In addition, in the simultaneous spin reference example, the game may be set to a low probability game state and a time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the regular drawing is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. In the following, a game state that combines the low probability game state and the time-saving game state is called a low probability time-saving state.

In addition, in the simultaneous spin reference example, the game state may be set to a high probability game state and a time-saving game state. In the following, a game state in which a high probability game state and a time-saving game state are combined is referred to as a high probability time-saving state or a high probability precursor state. The high probability time-saving state and the high probability precursor state will be described in more detail later.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, the game may be set to a high probability game state and a medium time-saving game state. In the medium time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal drawing is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and lower than in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. This game state can be set when an unforeseen event occurs, such as when the game ball is not launched appropriately. Hereinafter, a game state that combines a high probability game state and a medium time-saving game state is called a penalty state.

In addition, a presentation mode corresponding to the game state set on the main control board 300 is set on the sub-control board 330. The presentation mode specifies the background image and BGM displayed on the main presentation display section 200a, and the content of the presentation differs for each presentation mode. In other words, the player can identify the current game state by the presentation mode.

As described above, in the simultaneous spin reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a fluctuation pattern random number determination table is selected according to the game state when the big role lottery is performed, the reserved type, the number of fluctuations in that game state, and the type of pattern, and the fluctuation pattern number is determined by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, an actual variable target is set for each gaming state. The actual variable target indicates the type of reserve for which the big prize lottery should be held, and for each gaming state, either the special 1 reserve or the special 2 reserve is set as the actual variable target. In the normal state, the special 1 reserve is set as the actual variable target. Also, in the normal state, since the normal gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state, the first variable start port 120B is rarely opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to shoot the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 116a in order to make the gaming ball enter the first fixed start port 120A.

In the normal state, when a lottery for a big role is performed using the special 1 reserved symbol, which is the actual variable, and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table A is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table A, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Also, in the normal state, when a lottery for a big role is performed using the special 1 reserved symbol, and a big winning symbol is determined, table B is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table B, the variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when a big prize lottery is held based on the special 2 reserve, which is not actually subject to fluctuation, table C is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table C, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes. In this way, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player causes the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, the opportunity to hold a big prize lottery based on the special 2 reserve becomes extremely low.

To be more specific, the second start hole 122 is provided in the second play area 116b, and is configured as a fixed start hole that allows game balls to enter at all times. Furthermore, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second start hole 122 is located in a position where game balls can enter more easily than the first start hole 120. Therefore, if the fluctuation time for the special 2 reservation is set to a short time in the normal state, the player will be given more opportunities than necessary to win the big prize lottery. Therefore, in accordance with the original playability in the normal state, the fluctuation time is set to a long time, such as 10 minutes, in order to appropriately launch game balls toward the first play area 116a.

In the most advantageous state, the special 2 reserve is set as the actual variable. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to make the game ball enter the second starting hole 122. In the most advantageous state, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable, table D is selected as the variable pattern random number judgment table regardless of the determined pattern type. According to this table D, the variable time is always determined to be 10 seconds. In addition, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable, in the most advantageous state, the influence on the playability is smaller than when a big role lottery is performed by the special 2 reserve, which is not an actual variable in the normal state. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the variable time when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable, is set to be short at 10 seconds.

In the most advantageous state, when a lottery for a big win is performed using the special 2 reserved symbol, which is the actual variable, and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table E is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table E, the variable time is determined within the range of 1 to 3 seconds. Also, in the most advantageous state, when a lottery for a big win is performed using the special 2 reserved symbol, and a big winning symbol is determined, table F is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table F, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 10 seconds.

In both the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the special 1 reservation is set as the actual variable target. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the normal game state is set as the time-saving game state, and the first variable start port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in these two game states, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b to make the game ball enter the first variable start port 120B. In both of these game states, the same variable pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two game states have in common that the normal game state is a time-saving game state. In other words, when the normal game state is a time-saving game state, a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation, which is the actual variable target, and when a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined, table G is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table G, a variable time of one second is always determined. In addition, when the low probability time-saving state or high probability time-saving state is in effect, a lottery for a big role is held by special 1 reservation, and when a big win pattern is determined, table H is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table H, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

In the high probability premonition state, the special 1 reservation is set as the actual variable target. Also, in the high probability premonition state, the normal game state is set as the time-saving game state, and the first variable start port 120B is frequently controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, in the high probability premonition state, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b to make the game ball enter the first variable start port 120B. In the high probability premonition state, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation, which is the actual variable target, and a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined, table J is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table J, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 10 seconds. Also, in the high probability premonition state, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation and a big winning pattern is determined, table K is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table K, the variable time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, in the low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, and high probability premonition state, that is, in the normal game state when the time-saving game state is in effect, when a lottery for a big role is performed by the special 2 reserve, which is not actually subject to change, a different change pattern random number determination table is selected according to the number of changes related to the special 2 reserve since the game state was set (the number of times the pattern change display is made on the second special pattern display 162. Hereinafter, referred to as the "second change number"). Specifically, if the second change number since the time-saving game state was set is four or less, a special table is selected as the change pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined pattern type. According to this special table, the change time is always determined to be one minute. On the other hand, if the second change number since the time-saving game state was set is five or more, table I is selected as the change pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined pattern type. According to this table I, the change time is always determined to be ten minutes.

In the penalty state, the special 1 reserved ball is set as the actual variable object. Also, in the penalty state, the normal game state is set as the medium time shortening game state, and the first variable start port 120B is controlled to be in the open state at a certain frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to make the game ball enter the first variable start port 120B. In the penalty state, when the special 1 reserved ball is used to draw a big role and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table L is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table L, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Also, in the penalty state, when the special 1 reserved ball is used to draw a big role and a winning symbol is determined, table M is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table M, the variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in a penalty state, if a big prize lottery is held by a special 2 reserved symbol that is not actually subject to change, table N is selected as the change pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table N, the change time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

As described above, an actual change target is set for each game state, and when a big role lottery is held based on a reserved type that is an actual change target, the longest change time is 100 seconds. On the other hand, when a big role lottery is held based on a reserved type that is not an actual change target, the change time is approximately 10 minutes, so that games that go against the original gameplay are not played.

In the simultaneous rotation reference example, a case is described in which the average fluctuation time of the high-probability time-saving state (second period) is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state (first period), but the average fluctuation time of the high-probability time-saving state (second period) may be longer than the average fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state (first period). In other words, the average fluctuation time of the high-probability time-saving state (second period) and the average fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state (first period) may be different.

Figure 11 is a first diagram explaining the special electric role operation ram set table relating to the simultaneous spin reference example, and Figure 12 is a second diagram explaining the special electric role operation ram set table relating to the simultaneous spin reference example. The special electric role operation ram set table stores various data for controlling the big role game or the small win game, and during the big role game and the small win game, the first big win port solenoid 126c or the second big win port solenoid 128c is controlled to be energized by referring to the special electric role operation ram set table. In reality, a plurality of special electric role operation ram set tables are provided for each type of special pattern (big win pattern and small win pattern), and the corresponding table is set at the start of the big role game or the small win game according to the type of special pattern determined, but here, for convenience of explanation, the control data of the special pattern is shown for each type of pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11, the big prize game consists of multiple rounds of play in which the big prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, while the small prize game consists of only one round of play. According to this special electric device operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round of play begins), the maximum number of times the special electric device operates (the number of rounds of play executed during one big win play or small win play), the number of times the special electric device opens and closes (the number of times the large prize opening is opened during one round), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c for each number of times the large prize opening is opened, i.e., the opening time of one large prize opening), the specified number (the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be won in one round of play), the effective time for closing the large prize opening (the closing time of the large prize opening between rounds of play, i.e., the interval time), and the ending time (the waiting time from the end of the last round of play until the normal special play (the variable display of the patterns described later) is resumed) are stored in advance as control data for each type of special pattern as shown in the figure.

If a jackpot is won by the special 1 reservation and the special symbols A, B, or D are determined as the jackpot symbol, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed. In this big prize game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only once each in the first to fourth rounds of play. In each round of play, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first big prize opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the special 1 reservation and the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, a jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed. In these jackpot games, the first jackpot opening 126 is opened only once each in the first to tenth rounds of play. In each round of play, the first jackpot opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first jackpot opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a small prize is won by the special 1 reservation and the special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as the small prize symbol, a small prize game consisting of one round of play is executed. In this small prize game, the second large prize opening 128 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in one round of play.

As shown in FIG. 12, if a jackpot is won by the special 2 reserve and the special symbols F, G, or I are determined as the jackpot symbol, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed. In this big prize game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only once each in the first to fourth rounds of play. In each round of play, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first big prize opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the special 2 reserve and the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed. In this big prize game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only once each in the first to tenth rounds of play. In each round of play, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first big prize opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a small prize is won by the special 2 reservation and the special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as the small prize symbol, a small prize game consisting of one round of play is executed. Here, in the small prize game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small prize symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds in one round of play. The interval time during the round, which is the pause time between the two openings of the second large prize opening 128, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, the probability that the game balls will enter the second large prize opening 128 during this small prize game is low, considering the opening time of the second large prize opening 128 and the shooting interval of the game balls.

However, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the structure is such that game balls tend to remain on the movable piece 128b that keeps the second large prize opening 128 in a closed state, and when the movable piece 128b transitions to an open state, the game balls remaining on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second large prize opening 128. Therefore, when the second large prize opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128.

In addition, in a small prize game in which the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small prize symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 3 times in one round of play. In this case, the interval time during the round is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small prize game, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128.

Furthermore, in a small prize game in which the special pattern Z6 is determined as the small prize pattern, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 12 times in one round of play. In this case, the interval time during the round is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small prize game, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is possible to almost certainly cause a specified number of game balls (e.g. 10 balls) to enter the second large prize opening 128.

In addition, during the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out. For this reason, in the simultaneous spin reference example, special pattern Z4 is provided in which the balls are opened twice for 0.1 seconds in a small win game, and special pattern Z5 is provided in which the balls are opened three times for 0.1 seconds in a small win game, and the firing prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed simply by changing the selection ratio of these.

Figure 13 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting the game state after the big win game ends in the simultaneous spin reference example. In the simultaneous spin reference example, when a big win game is executed, the game state setting table is referenced and the game state after the big win game ends is set according to the game state at the time of winning the big win, the reserved type, and the type of special pattern (big win pattern).

If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, when the jackpot is won by the special 1 reservation, which is the actual variable, the game state after the big prize game is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. Specifically, if the special pattern A is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to a low probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the "time-saving number of times") is set to 100. This means that the time-saving game state continues until the big prize lottery is performed 100 times. However, the above-mentioned time-saving number of times indicates the maximum number of times that it continues in the time-saving game state of 1, and if a jackpot is won before the above-mentioned number of times of continuation is reached, the game state will be set again. Therefore, if the time-saving game state is set after the big win game ends, and a lottery result other than a jackpot is drawn 100 times without a jackpot result being drawn in the time-saving game state, the game state will change to a non-time-saving game state (normal state).

In addition, if special patterns B or D are determined as the jackpot pattern, the machine will be set to a high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, "next" is set as the high-probability number of times, and the high-probability game state will continue until the next jackpot is won. In addition, "next" is set as the number of time-saving times, and the time-saving game state will continue until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, if special patterns B or D are determined, the high-probability time-saving state will continue after the big win game until the next jackpot is won.

In addition, if special patterns C or E are determined as the jackpot pattern, the game will be set to a high probability precursor state (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number of times, and the time-saving number of times is set to 100. If special patterns C or E are determined, the high probability game state will continue until the next jackpot is won, while the time-saving game state will end after 100 times. Therefore, if special patterns C or E are determined, after the big prize game, the game state will transition to the most advantageous state when the results of the big prize lottery have been derived 100 times.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, when the jackpot is won by the special 2 reserve, which is not actually subject to change, the game state after the big win is set as follows. That is, if the special pattern F is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to the normal state (the special game state is a low probability game state, and the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state). In addition, if the special patterns G to J are determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to the penalty state (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a medium time-saving game state). At this time, the number of high probability wins and the number of time-saving wins are both set to "next time".

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, when the jackpot is won by a special 1 reserve that is not actually subject to change, the game state after the big win is set as follows. That is, if special pattern A is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to a low probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In addition, if special patterns B to E are determined as the jackpot pattern, the game state after the big win is set to the same as the normal state and penalty state.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, when a jackpot is won by the special 2 reserve, which is essentially subject to change, the game state after the big win is set as follows. That is, if the special pattern F is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of time-saving times is set to 100. Also, if the special pattern G or I is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to a high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of high-probability times and the number of time-saving times are set to "next time".

In addition, if the special symbols H or J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability premonition state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of high probability times is set to "next time," and the number of time-saving times is set to 100.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state, or a high probability premonition state, in other words, if the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the game state after the big win is set to the same as the normal state or the penalty state.

Figure 14 is a diagram explaining a winning decision random number judgment table for the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal symbol operating port 125, a normal symbol judgment process (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is performed, which corresponds to whether or not to control the flow of electricity to the movable piece 120b of the first variable start port 120B.

As will be described in detail later, when a game ball passes through gate 124 or enters normal map operation port 125, one winning determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 99, and this random number value is stored in the normal map reserve memory area of main RAM 300c, up to a maximum of four. In other words, the normal map reserve memory area has four memory sections for saving winning determination random numbers. Therefore, if a game ball passes through gate 124 or enters normal map operation port 125 with winning determination random numbers stored in all four memory sections of the normal map reserve memory area, no winning determination random number will be stored based on the passage of the game ball. In the following, the winning determination random number stored in the normal map reserve memory area when a game ball passes through gate 124 or enters normal map operation port 125 is referred to as a normal map reserve.

When the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state and a normal symbol lottery is started, the non-time-saving game state winning random number judgment table is referenced as shown in FIG. 14(a). According to this winning random number judgment table for non-time-saving game state, if the winning random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and if the winning random number is 1 to 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in a non-time-saving game state, that is, the probability of winning, is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when a winning symbol is determined in this normal symbol lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable start opening 120B is controlled to the open state, and when a losing symbol is determined, the movable piece 120b of the first variable start opening 120B is maintained in the closed state.

When starting the normal symbol lottery in the intermediate time-saving play state, the winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the intermediate time-saving play state is referenced, as shown in FIG. 14(b). According to this winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the intermediate time-saving play state, if the winning symbol determination random number is 0-49, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and if the winning symbol determination random number is 50-99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in the intermediate time-saving play state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 50/100.

In addition, when starting the regular symbol lottery in the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state win determination random number judgment table is referenced, as shown in FIG. 14(c). According to this time-saving play state win determination random number judgment table, if the win determination random number is 0-98, a winning symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol, and if the win determination random number is 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in the time-saving play state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 99/100.

Figure 15(a) is a diagram explaining the normal pattern change time data table for the simultaneous spin reference example, and Figure 15(b) is a diagram explaining the opening and closing control pattern table for the simultaneous spin reference example. As described above, when the normal pattern lottery is performed, the change time of the normal pattern is determined. The normal pattern change time data table is referenced when determining the change time of the normal pattern when a winning pattern or a losing pattern is determined by the normal pattern lottery. According to this normal pattern change time data table, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state or a medium time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 10 seconds, and when the game state is set to a time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 1 second. When the change time is determined in this way, the normal pattern display 168 is displayed (blinking) for the determined time. Then, when a winning pattern is determined, the normal pattern display 168 is lit, and when a losing pattern is determined, the normal pattern display 168 is turned off.

When the winning symbol is determined by the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is lit, the movable piece 120b of the first variable start port 120B is controlled to energize by referring to the opening/closing control pattern table, as shown in FIG. 15(b). Note that, in reality, an opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set when the normal electric role solenoid 120c starts to energize, depending on the game state when the normal symbol is determined.

Once the winning pattern is determined, the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to open and close by referring to the opening and closing control pattern table, as shown in Figure 15 (b). According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal power opening (waiting time until the first variable start port 120B starts opening), the maximum number of normal electric role opening/closing switching times (number of times the first variable start port 120B is opened), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the normal electric role solenoid 120c for each number of times the first variable start port 120B is opened, i.e., the opening time of the first variable start port 120B once), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be won into the first variable start port 120B during the full opening of the first variable start port 120B), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the first variable start port 120B, i.e., the pause time), the normal power effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), and the normal power end wait time (waiting time until the variable display of the normal pattern described later is resumed after the normal power effective state time has elapsed) are stored in advance for each game state as shown in the figure as control data for the first variable start port 120B.

In this way, by setting the winning probability of the normal symbol, the variable time and the opening time, as shown in the lower part of Figure 15 (b), the fired prize ball ratio (the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player when game balls enter the first variable start port 120B, the second start port 122, the normal symbol operating port 125 and the large prize entry port to the game balls fired into the game area 116) is the number of fired balls:number of prize balls = 100:20 in the non-time-saving game state, the number of fired balls:number of prize balls = 100:40 in the intermediate time-saving game state, and the number of fired balls:number of prize balls = 100:99 in the time-saving game state.

The opening and closing conditions of the first variable start port 120B stipulate three elements: the probability of winning a normal symbol, the time for which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B. In other words, by combining the three elements of the probability of winning a normal symbol, the time for which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B, it is possible to set the frequency of game balls entering the first variable start port 120B and the ratio of prize balls fired in each of the non-time-saving game state, intermediate time-saving game state, and time-saving game state. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is merely one example, and it is sufficient to combine the three elements so that the ratio of prize balls fired is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

Figure 16 is a diagram explaining the transition of game states according to the original gameplay of the simultaneous spin reference example. With the above configuration, the game machine 100 realizes the following gameplay. Note that here, the case where the registration setting value is set to "1" is explained. First, in the initial state of the game machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in Figure 16 (a). In the normal state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 reservation, so the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 116a to make the game ball enter the first fixed start hole 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player will perform what is called a "left shot" in the normal state.

When a game ball enters the first fixed starting hole 120A, the special 1 reserve is stored in the first special chart reserve memory area. The special 1 reserves stored in the first special chart reserve memory area are read out sequentially when the starting conditions are met, and a lottery for a big prize is held based on the read special 1 reserves. At this time, the probability of winning a big prize is set to approximately 1/300.6. Under normal conditions, the game is played with the aim of winning a big prize in the lottery for a big prize based on this special 1 reserve. Note that the ratio of prize balls fired when a game ball is fired toward the first game area 116a is set to 100:20, and the number of game balls will decrease during play.

In the normal state, if a jackpot is won in the big prize lottery using the special 1 reservation, a big prize game is executed. In this big prize game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened and a round game is executed four or ten times, allowing the player to win four or ten rounds of prize balls. If a jackpot is won using the special 1 reservation, one of the special patterns A to E is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In the normal state, if the jackpot symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is special symbol A, the game state after the big win will be the low-probability time-saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). When a jackpot is won with special 1 reserved, there is a 30% probability that special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 30% probability that the game state will transition to the low-probability time-saving state. In the low-probability time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 reserved, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player will hit the ball to the right, aiming at the second game area 116b, in order to get the game ball to enter the first variable start hole 120B.

In other words, in this low-probability time-saving state, just like in the normal state, the player plays with the goal of winning the jackpot in the big prize lottery based on the special 1 reserve. In the low-probability time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/300.6, but since the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b frequently opens. Therefore, the ratio of fired prize balls is 100:99, and the player can aim for a jackpot while reducing the consumption of game balls.

When the game transitions to the low probability time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is set to 100, and if no jackpot is won in the 100 big prize draws, the game state will transition back to the normal state (time-saving time ...

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot pattern displayed on the first special pattern display 160 is the special pattern B or D, the game state after the big win will be the high probability time-saving state shown in FIG. 16(c). When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reserved, there is a 35% probability that the special pattern B or D will be determined as the jackpot pattern. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the game state will transition to the high probability time-saving state. In the high probability time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to the special 1 reserved, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player will hit the ball to the right, aiming at the second game area 116b, in order to get the game ball into the first variable start hole 120B.

In other words, in this high-probability time-saving state, just like in the normal state, the player plays with the goal of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the big prize based on the special 1 reserve. In the high-probability time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/105.7, and since the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b frequently opens. Therefore, the ratio of fired prize balls is 100:99, and the player can play the lottery for the big prize while reducing the consumption of game balls. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving state, it can be said that the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed to be won.

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot pattern displayed on the first special pattern display 160 is the special pattern C or E, the game state after the big win game will be the high probability premonition state shown in FIG. 16(d). When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reserved, there is a 35% probability that the special pattern C or E will be determined as the jackpot pattern. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the game state will transition to the high probability premonition state. In the high probability premonition state, the actual variable target is set to the special 1 reserved, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player will hit the ball to the right, aiming at the second game area 116b, in order to get the game ball to enter the first variable start hole 120B.

When the special symbols C or E are selected, the game is set to a high probability premonition state and the time-saving count is set to 100. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big win reaches 100, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. As a result, the game state transitions to the most advantageous state shown in FIG. 16(e) due to the time-saving end. As will be described in detail later, in the most advantageous state, the number of game balls can be increased simply by continuing to fire game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high probability premonition state, the objective of the game is not to win a jackpot, but to end the time-saving state without winning a jackpot.

According to the special 1 reserve that is the actual variable target in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state described above, when a jackpot is won, special patterns A to E are determined as the jackpot pattern. When special pattern A is determined, four rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes the low probability time-saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). Also, when special patterns B or D are determined, four or ten rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes the high probability time-saving state. Also, when special patterns C or E are determined, four or ten rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes the high probability premonition state.

In the most advantageous state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the special 2 reserve is stored in the second special chart reserve memory area. The special 2 reserves stored in the second special chart reserve memory area are read out sequentially when the starting conditions are met, and a lottery for a big prize is held based on the read special 2 reserves. At this time, the probability of winning a big prize is set to approximately 1/105.7, and the probability of winning a small prize is set to approximately 1/3.45. In the most advantageous state, the main objective of the game is to win a small prize in the lottery for a big prize based on this special 2 reserve.

Specifically, when a game ball is shot into the second game area 116b, the ratio of prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the second start hole 122 to the number of shot balls is set to about 100:60 to 80. In the most advantageous state, the probability of winning a small prize in the large role lottery by the special 2 reservation is about 1/3.45, so small prize games are frequently played. Here, when a small prize is won by the special 2 reservation, small prize patterns Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in a small prize game when the small prize pattern Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large prize hole 128. In a small prize game when the small prize pattern Z5 is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large prize hole 128. Furthermore, in a small win game in which the small win symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, approximately the specified number of game balls enter the second large winning hole 128.

When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. As a result, in the most advantageous state, the fired prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of the number of all prize balls to the number of fired balls, is 100:120, and the number of game balls can be increased simply by continuing to fire game balls toward the second game area 116b.

In addition, in this most advantageous state, the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 120b is almost never in the open state. Also, in the most advantageous state, the special game state is a high probability game state, and since the probability of winning a jackpot in the most advantageous state is approximately 1 in 105.7, in the most advantageous state, it can be said that the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed to be won.

According to the special 2 reserve, which is the actual variable target in this most advantageous state, when a jackpot is won, special symbols F to J are determined as the jackpot symbol. When special symbol F is determined, four rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a low-probability time-saving state as shown in FIG. 16(b). When special symbols G or I are determined, four or ten rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high-probability time-saving state. When special symbols H or J are determined, four or ten rounds of play are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high-probability precursor state.

The most advantageous state is much more advantageous than other game states, so the main objective of playing on the gaming machine 100 is to transition the game state to the most advantageous state. As described above, the game first starts in the normal state, but there is no immediate transition from this normal state to the most advantageous state. Therefore, the transition route to the most advantageous state on the gaming machine 100 is the transition route that transitions to the most advantageous state via the high probability precursor state.

Furthermore, in the simultaneous spin reference example, aside from the time-saving feature escaping in the high probability premonition state, the condition for transitioning from the high probability premonition state to the most advantageous state is set to be the winning of a specific small win symbol. Specifically, when a small win is won by the special 1 reserve, which is the actual variable subject in the high probability premonition state, the small win symbol is determined to be special symbol Z1 with a probability of 1%, special symbol Z2 with a probability of 69%, and special symbol Z3 with a probability of 30% (see Figure 8 (c)).

At this time, if the special pattern Z1 is determined as the small win pattern, the time-saving game state ends with the end of the small win game, and as a result, the game state transitions to the most advantageous state.

In this way, the player transitions to the most advantageous state upon winning a specific small jackpot, which creates a constant sense of expectation and tension for the player, compared to a situation where the most advantageous state is reached only when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number (100 times).

In addition, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, there is a probability of about 1 in 3.45 of winning a small jackpot. Therefore, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, small jackpot play is frequently executed, just like in the most advantageous state. However, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, the normal play state is a time-saving play state. Also, as will be described in detail later, the normal play state is maintained in the time-saving play state even during a small jackpot play. Therefore, although the second large prize winning port 128 is opened during a small jackpot play, the first variable start port 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable start port 120B is located above the second large winning port 128, and in the time-saving game state, the opening time of the first variable start port 120B is much longer than the opening time of the second large winning port 128. Therefore, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, most of the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b enter the first variable start port 120B, and almost no game balls enter the second large winning port 128. As a result, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, unlike the most advantageous state, the game balls will gradually decrease even if a right hit is made during play.

As described above, when the game progresses according to the actual variable object in accordance with the original gameplay, if a jackpot is won, the game state after the big win is set to either a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, or a high-probability premonition state. The high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability premonition state have in common that the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state. On the other hand, the high-probability time-saving state continues until the next jackpot is won, whereas the high-probability premonition state differs in that the game state transitions to the most advantageous state when a specific small jackpot (special pattern Z1) is won or the time-saving state ends.

Also, in the high-probability time-saving state, the fluctuation time for small wins and misses is set to 1 second, whereas in the high-probability premonition state, the fluctuation time for small wins and misses is set within the range of 3 to 10 seconds (see Figure 10 (b)). In other words, the average fluctuation time in the high-probability time-saving state is set shorter than the average fluctuation time in the high-probability premonition state.

Therefore, in the high probability time-saving state, the time of change during small wins and misses is relatively short, so that the actual change target can be consumed at high speed until a big win is won. Although detailed explanation is omitted, during the change time of the special pattern, the change display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is performed on the sub-control board 330. In the high probability time-saving state, the change display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c also becomes relatively short. Therefore, in the high probability time-saving state, as long as the special 1 reservation continues to be stored, the special 1 reservation (the change display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c) continues to be consumed at high speed, so that the time until a big win can be shortened, and the player can play until the next big win without feeling (reducing) stress.

On the other hand, in the high probability premonition state, the fluctuation time during small wins and misses is relatively long, but the sub-control board 330 performs a presentation to see whether or not the most advantageous state will be entered. Therefore, the player can play while hoping that the most advantageous state will be entered.

In this way, in the high-probability time-saving state, even if a specific small jackpot (special pattern Z1) is won, there will be no transition to the most advantageous state, but by setting the average fluctuation time to a short value, the time until the next big jackpot is won can be shortened, reducing stress for the player. Also, in the high-probability precursor state, the average fluctuation time is set to be longer than in the high-probability time-saving state, but during that fluctuation time, it is possible to perform a presentation as to whether or not the most advantageous state will be entered, creating a sense of expectation and tension for the player.

As described above, a high-probability time-saving state and a high-probability precursor state are provided, which have in common that the special game state is a high-probability game state and the normal game state is a time-saving game state, and by making the average fluctuation time of the high-probability time-saving state shorter than the average fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state, new gameplay can be provided.

Figure 17 is a diagram explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not played properly in the simultaneous spin reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the display of the changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160 and the display of the changing patterns on the second special pattern display 162 are performed simultaneously in parallel. At this time, if a large role lottery is performed based on a reservation other than the actual change target, and there is a possibility that the player may suffer a disadvantage as a result, the change time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after a large role lottery is performed based on a reservation other than the actual change target, for example, if the game is interrupted, a large win based on a reservation other than the actual change target may be confirmed. In this case, the game state will transition as shown in Figure 17.

The main processing of the main control board 300 to achieve the above gameplay characteristics is explained below.

Figure 18 is a diagram explaining the gaming machine status flag for the simultaneous spin reference example. In the main control board 300, the gaming machine status flag manages whether or not the game can proceed. The gaming machine status flag is set to one of six flag values from 00H to 05H. A flag value of 00H for the gaming machine status flag indicates a playable state. When the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the game is controlled to proceed, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is stopped.

The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 01H indicates a setting change state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates a setting confirmation state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value can be confirmed by displaying it on the performance display monitor 184, for example. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 03H indicates a setting abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the registered setting value is considered abnormal and play is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, play is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 05H indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, play is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing according to the gaming machine status flag is performed.

(CPU Initialization Processing of Main Control Board 300)
FIG. 19 is a first flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 20 is a second flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes required for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a wait processing time in a timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power interruption warning signal has been detected. The main control board 300 is provided with a power interruption detection circuit, which outputs a power interruption warning signal when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. If a power interruption warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S100-3, and if a power interruption warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed or not. If it is judged that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-9, and if it is judged that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes the processes required to permit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag before the power is turned off into the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was turned off (is normal) and whether the backup flag is normal. If it is determined that the backup flag and the checksum are normal, the process proceeds to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either one or both are not normal, the process proceeds to step S100-25.

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include a setting value or a gaming machine status flag as the first address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button has been pressed down). If it is judged that a RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S100-31, and if it is judged that a RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S100-19.

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (playable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. If it is determined that all three conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S100-21, and if it is determined that any one of the three conditions is not met, the process proceeds to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 02H (setting confirmation status). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state where the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the gaming machine enters the setting confirmation status.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the areas of the main RAM 300c subsequent to the top address set in step S100-15 that are to be cleared when the power is restored, and then proceeds to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an outside area read/write check process for checking and clearing the read/write memory in the unused area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including a setting value and a gaming machine status flag as the first address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the check result of the read/write memory in the above step S100-31 is normal or not. If it is judged as normal, the process proceeds to step S100-37, and if it is judged as not normal, the process proceeds to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register and moves the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a judges whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. If it is judged that 02H is set, the process proceeds to step S100-39, and if it is judged that 02H is not set, the process proceeds to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets the D register to 00H (playable state).

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting change conditions are satisfied. If it is judged that the setting change conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-43, and if it is judged that the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-45. Note that the setting change conditions here include at least that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets the D register to 01H (setting changed state).

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the items in the main RAM 300c that are to be cleared when the RAM is cleared, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (storing the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer) of a payout command (RAM clear designation command) to inform the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable state). If it is judged to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S110, and if it is judged not to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs a sub-command group set process, which will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting predetermined commands to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt period.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to disable interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the end value of the winning symbol random number. In other words, when the winning symbol random number goes through one cycle from the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number - 1 by the updating process of the winning symbol random number described later, the winning symbol random number is updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main commands) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300 a performs processing to transmit the sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. Note that, hereinafter, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number for determining the change presentation pattern are collectively referred to as the change presentation random number.

Figure 21 is a flowchart explaining the sub-command group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting predetermined commands to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process to set a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value designation command setting process for setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special chart 1 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special chart 1 reservation designation command indicating the special chart 1 reservation number in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special chart 2 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special chart 2 reservation designation command indicating the special chart 2 reservation number in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a count command setting process for setting a count command indicating the remaining number of times in the time-shortened gaming state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process that sets a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating the variation pattern selection state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special game phase designation command setting process for setting a special game phase designation command indicating a special game management phase in a transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is in a special symbol variation waiting state. If it is judged that the special symbol variation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S110-21, and if it is judged that the special symbol variation waiting state is not in the special symbol variation waiting state, the sub-command group set process is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the sub-command group setting process.

Next, we will explain the interrupt processing in the main control board 300. Here, we will explain the power-off evacuation processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing.

(Power off save process of main control board 300 (XINT interrupt process))
22 is a flow chart for explaining the power-off save process (XINT interrupt process) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power-off save process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the registers.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power-off warning signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-11. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-7.

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the registers.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt, and ends the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes an output port clear process to stop the output of the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes a checksum setting process that calculates and stores a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a RAM protect setting process required to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
In order to set a power interruption occurrence monitoring time, the main CPU 300a sets the counter value of a loop counter to a predetermined number of times the power interruption detection signal has been detected.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power-off warning signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-17. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-23.

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17 by one.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the loop counter is 0. If it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is judged that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned CPU initialization process (step S100).

If a power outage actually occurs, operation of the gaming machine 100 will stop while steps S300-17 to S300-25 are looping.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
23 is a flow chart for explaining the timer interrupt process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generating circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the registers.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and executes dynamic port output processing which controls the lighting of the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved indicator 164, the second special pattern reserved indicator 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved indicator 170, the right hit notification indicator 172, and the performance display monitor 184.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes a port input process to accurately obtain the latest switch states.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). If it is judged to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S400-15, and if it is judged not to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is equal to or greater than 03H (abnormal setting). If it is judged to be equal to or greater than 03H, the process proceeds to step S400-27. If it is judged to be not equal to or greater than 03H, the process proceeds to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes a setting-related process, and moves the process to step S400-27. The setting-related process will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a timer update process to update various timer counters. Here, unless otherwise specified, the timer counters are decremented every time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 300 is performed, and the decrement stops when the timer counters reach 0.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes an update process for the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number, similar to step S100-61 described above.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding 1, and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has completed one cycle, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the win determination random number use hardware random numbers updated by a hardware random number generation unit built into the main control board 300. The hardware random number generation unit updates both the jackpot determination random number and the win determination random number according to certain rules, automatically changing the random number sequence each time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and changing the start value each time the system is reset.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a executes a switch management process to determine whether or not a signal has been input from the first fixed start hole detection switch 120As, the first variable start hole detection switch 120Bs, the second start hole detection switch 122s, the gate detection switch 124s, the normal operation hole detection switch 125s, the first large prize hole detection switch 126s, and the second large prize hole detection switch 128s. Details of this switch management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special games. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an error management process for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general prize hole detection switch 118s, the first start hole detection switch 120s, the second start hole detection switch 122s, the first large prize hole detection switch 126s, and the second large prize hole detection switch 128s, and executes prize hole switch processing to increment the corresponding counters for prize ball control, etc.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the counter for controlling the winning balls set in the above step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes an LED display setting process which sets display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs), such as the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved indicator 164, the second special pattern reserved indicator 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved indicator 170, and the right hit notification indicator 172, in an output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a solenoid output image synthesis process to synthesize the solenoid output images of the normal electric role solenoid 120c, the first large prize opening solenoid 126c, and the second large prize opening solenoid 128c, and store them in an output port buffer.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes a port output process for outputting the values of the common output buffers stored in the respective output port buffers to the output ports.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to disable interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating a base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and executes a performance display monitor control processing for setting common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 in a common output buffer. In the performance display monitor control processing, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may switch between displaying the base ratio for the current period and the base ratio for the previous period at predetermined time intervals. Also, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched in response to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a restores the registers and ends the timer interrupt process.

Figure 24 is a flowchart explaining the setting-related process (S450) for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). If it is judged to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-3, and if it is judged not to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values stored in the setting value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input). If it is judged that the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-7, and if it is judged that the RAM clear switch 182s has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-9.

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the setting value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting value of the processing area is in the range of 1 to 6. If it is judged that the setting value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and if it is judged that the setting value is not in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area in the setting value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting change switch 180s is on. If it is judged that the setting change switch 180s is on, the setting-related process is terminated, and if it is judged that the setting change switch 180s is not on, the process proceeds to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end designation command, which indicates the end of the setting-related processing, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the sub-command group set process of Fig. 21. That is, when the setting-related process is executed, at the end of the process, the model command, the setting value designation command, the special chart 1 reservation designation command, the special chart 2 reservation designation command, the number of times command, the variation pattern selection state designation command, the special chart phase designation command, and the customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (playable state), and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 open, the setting change switch 180s on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state) in the CPU initialization process (Figure 19). After that, the timer interrupt process is executed, but because the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), all processes related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in Figure 23) are stopped, and setting-related processes are executed.

The setting-related process is executed repeatedly while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related process, pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as a setting change operation for the registered setting value. In other words, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) that accepts setting change operations, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is switched to one of multiple setting values in response to the setting change operation.

When the setting change switch 180s is switched off while the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change process ends and the gaming machine status flag is set to 00H (playable state). This allows processing related to the progress of the game to be executed starting from the next timer interrupt process.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, after the RAM clear button is pressed, i.e., after the acceptance of the setting change operation of the registered setting value has ended, a setting value designation command corresponding to the registered setting value is sent to the sub-control board 330 in the sub-command group set processing. On the other hand, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent to the sub-control board 330. In this way, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent, and when the acceptance of the setting change operation has ended and the game transitions to a state in which it is possible to proceed, the setting value designation command is sent, thereby reducing the risk of the registered setting value being obtained illegally.

In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, multiple flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), setting-related processing can be executed, and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, setting value designation commands are not sent while the game is in progress, and the risk of registered setting values being obtained illegally is reduced.

Next, we will explain in detail the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, and the regular game management process in step S700 of the timer interrupt process described above.

Figure 25 is a flowchart explaining the switch management process (step S500) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the gate detection switch is ON, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s has been turned ON. If it is judged that the gate detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S510, and if it is judged that the gate detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passing process based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124. The gate passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal operation port detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the normal operation port 125 and the detection signal from the normal operation port detection switch 125s has been turned ON. If it is judged that the normal operation port detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S510, and if it is judged that the normal operation port detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-5.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes gate passing processing based on the entry of a game ball into the normal operation port 125.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first fixed start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first fixed start hole 120A and a detection signal has been input from the first fixed start hole detection switch 120As. If it is determined that the first fixed start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first fixed start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes a first start hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed start hole 120A. The first start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first variable start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first variable start hole 120B and a detection signal has been input from the first variable start hole detection switch 120Bs. If it is determined that the first variable start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-9.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes a first start hole passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first variable start hole 120B. The first start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 122 and a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 122s. If it is determined that the second start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that the second start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-11.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes a second start hole passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start hole 122. The second start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time has come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as being on, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128 and a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 126s or the second large prize opening detection switch 128s. If it is determined that the time has come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as being on, the process proceeds to step S540, and if it is determined that the time has not come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as being on, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the game ball has entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128 properly, and if it judges that the game ball has entered properly, it executes a large prize opening passage process for transmitting a large prize opening entry command, which indicates that the game ball has entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128, to the sub-control board 330. The details of this large prize opening passage process will be described later.

Figure 26 is a flowchart explaining the gate passage process (step S510) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than 4. If it is judged that the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and if it is judged that the normal pattern reserved ball counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a determines which of the four memory sections in the general reserve memory area is to be the target memory section in which to save the acquired winning determination random number.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in the above step S510-1 in the target memory calculated in the above step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in the transmission buffer, and terminates the gate passing process.

Figure 27 is a flowchart explaining the first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. The special symbol identification value is used to identify whether the reserved type is special 1 reserved or special 2 reserved, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reserved, and the special symbol identification value (01H) indicates special 2 reserved.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process and ends the first start hole passing process. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second start hole passing process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be explained after the explanation of the second start hole passing process.

Figure 28 is a flowchart explaining the second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special pattern random number acquisition process described later, and ends the second starting port passing process.

Figure 29 is a flow chart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the first start hole passing process (step S520) and the second start hole passing process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of reserved balls for the target special symbol. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 1, i.e., the reserved number for special 1, is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 2, i.e., the reserved number for special 2, is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random numbers updated by the hardware random number generating unit.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the number of reserved balls with the target special symbol loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit. If it is judged to be equal to or greater than the upper limit, the main CPU 300a ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. If it is judged to be equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special pattern reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target memory section among the memory sections of the special chart reserved memory area into which the acquired jackpot determination random number is to be saved.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a obtains the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the winning symbol random number updated in step S400-13, and the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and stores them in the target memory section calculated in step S535-11.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special reserved command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 1) of the special reserved ball number counter, and the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 2) of the special reserved ball number counter. As a result, the special reserved number of special 1 and the special reserved number of special 2 are transmitted to the sub-control board 330 every time the special reserved number of special 1 or special reserved number of special 2 is stored.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs the acquisition time performance determination process and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this acquisition time performance determination process, the result of the big role lottery and the variable pattern number are provisionally determined, and a pre-reading designation command according to the provisional determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. This acquisition time performance determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 30 is a flowchart explaining the performance determination process (step S536) at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number judgment table based on the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game is in a high probability game state or a low probability game state. Specifically, if the game is in a low probability game state, the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table (see FIG. 6) is selected, and if the game is in a high probability game state, the high probability jackpot determination random number judgment table (see FIG. 7) is selected. Then, based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target memory unit in step S535-13, the main CPU 300a performs a special symbol win provisional judgment process to provisionally judge whether the game is a jackpot, a small win, or a miss.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol provisional determination process for provisionally determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the provisional big role lottery in the above step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol provisional win determination process) is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win), and the reserved type stored in the target memory unit in the above step S535-13 are loaded, the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 8) is selected to extract the special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol or small win symbol) is saved. Also, if the result of the provisional big role lottery in the above step S536-1 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for loss (type of loss symbol) corresponding to the reserved type is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a selects a fluctuation pattern random number determination table according to the special pattern probability state flag, the hold type, the number of fluctuations in the game state, and the special pattern determination data (type of special pattern) extracted in the above step S536-3, and sets the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a provisionally determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table set in the above step S536-7 and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the target memory unit in the above step S535-13.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead specified variable pattern command (look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the variable pattern number provisionally determined in step S536-9 above, and terminates the performance determination process at the time of acquisition.

Figure 31 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening passage process (step S540) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that the special prize opening detection switch is ON, it loads the special game management phase. The special game management phase indicates the stage of the special game execution process, that is, the progress of the special game, and is updated according to the stage of the special game execution process, as will be described later in detail.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase loaded in the above step S540-1 indicates a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher. The special game management phase has nine stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H correspond to the stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher. Since the large prize game or the small prize game is executed when the special game management phase is 01H to 08H, it is judged here whether the large prize game or the small prize game is currently being played. If it is judged that the special game management phase indicates a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher, the process proceeds to step S540-5, and if it is judged that the special game management phase does not indicate a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher, the process proceeds to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a large prize opening ball entry command, indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128, in the transmission buffer, and ends the large prize opening passage process.

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a determines that the entry of the game ball into the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128 is inappropriate, executes a prescribed error process, and terminates the large prize opening passage process.

Figure 32 is a diagram explaining the special game management phase in the simultaneous spin reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous spin reference example, a special game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and a normal game triggered by the passage of a game ball through the gate 124 or the entry of a game ball into the normal operation port 125 proceed simultaneously in parallel. The processing related to the special game is executed step by step and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to such special games by the special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for controlling the execution of special games, and each of these special game control modules is associated with a special game management phase. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "special symbol variation processing" is called, when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H", a module for executing "large prize opening pre-processing" is called, when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H", a module for executing "large prize opening control processing" is called, when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H", a module for executing "large prize opening closing valid processing" is called, and when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H", a module for executing "large prize opening end wait processing" is called.

Figure 33 is a flowchart explaining the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 and starts processing.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

Figure 34 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous spin reference example. This special symbol variation process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol change waiting process, which will be described later with reference to Figures 35 to 38.

(Step S620)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation process, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Step S630)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol stop symbol display process, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

Figure 35 is a first flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process (step S610) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example, and Figure 36 is a second flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process (step S610) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the interruption flag is on. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, which will be described later in detail, a small win symbol may be displayed in a stationary state on the second special symbol display 162 while a symbol is being displayed in a variable state on the first special symbol display 160. In this case, when a small win symbol is displayed in a stationary state on the second special symbol display 162, a small win game is executed. During this time, the subtraction of the variable time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is suspended, and after the small win game ends, the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is resumed. The interruption flag is turned on if the first special symbol display 160 is displaying a variable symbol when the small win symbol is displayed in a stationary state on the second special symbol display 162. Here, if it is determined that the interruption flag is on, the process proceeds to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the interruption flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S610-5.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for resuming the varying display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, and transfers the processing to step S610-51 in FIG.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the number of reserved special 1 is 1 or more. If it is judged that the number of reserved special 1 is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-7, and if it is judged that the number of reserved special 1 is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-51.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first special symbol display 160 is displaying a variable pattern based on the special 1 reserved symbol, or whether the symbol based on the special 1 reserved symbol is displaying a stopped symbol (counting the stop display time). If it is judged that the variable pattern is being displayed or that the symbol is displaying a stopped symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-51, and if it is judged that the variable pattern is not being displayed and that the symbol is not displaying a stopped symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a transfers the special 1 reservation stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation memory area in a block to a storage section with a smaller ordinal number by one. Specifically, the special 1 reservation stored in the second storage section to the fourth storage section is transferred to the first storage section to the third storage section. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the special 1 reservation stored in the 1st storage section is block transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this special symbol memory area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol reservation ball number counter corresponding to the special 1 reservation is subtracted by "1", and a reservation subtraction designation command indicating that the special 1 reservation has been subtracted by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a changing pattern. If it is judged that the changing pattern is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-17, and if it is judged that the changing pattern is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol winning determination process for performing a lottery for a big win. This special symbol winning determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process to determine a special symbol. Here, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and reserved type transferred to the 0th memory unit are loaded, the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or small win symbol random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol) is saved. Also, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for loss is saved. Then, after the special symbol determination data is saved, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol finally displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is a jackpot symbol. If it is judged to be a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-19. If it is judged not to be a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the big win determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit is within the range of the small win. If it is judged to be within the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-21, and if it is judged to be outside the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-23.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning pattern random number and reserved type transferred to the 0th memory unit, selects the corresponding small winning pattern random number determination table to extract special pattern determination data, and saves the extracted special pattern determination data (type of small winning pattern).

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the losing symbol, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the second special symbol display 162 is performing a variable display of the symbol that will eventually stop and display the big win symbol, the first special symbol display 160 will always perform only the variable display of the symbol that will eventually stop and display the small win symbol or the losing symbol.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in the above steps S610-15, S610-21, and S610-23. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that will finally be lit up.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variable number determination process for determining a variable pattern number. The details of this special symbol variable number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-27)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-29)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery is a big prize or not, and if it is a big prize, loads the special symbol judgment data saved in the above step S610-15 and checks the type of the big prize symbol. Then, referring to the game state setting table and the current game state, it judges the game state, the high probability number of times, and the time-saving number of times to be set after the big prize game ends, and saves the judgment results in the special symbol probability state reserve flag, the time-saving state reserve flag, the high probability number cut reserve counter, and the time-saving number cut reserve counter. Note that if a losing symbol is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in order to start the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segment that constitutes the first special symbol display 160, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter is provided separately as a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162, and here, a counter value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number-of-plays management process. Here, a process for ending the time-limited gaming state according to the number of times of fluctuation is performed. This number-of-plays management process will be described later.

(Step S610-35)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a number command indicating the number of times remaining (actual remaining number of times) until the high probability number of times and the time-saving number of times reach 0.

(Step S610-37)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Step S610-51)
As shown in Fig. 36, the main CPU 300a judges whether the number of reserved special 2 is 1 or more. If it is judged that the number of reserved special 2 is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-53, and if it is judged that the number of reserved special 2 is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-85.

(Step S610-53)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a variable pattern based on the special 2 reservation, or whether the symbol based on the special 2 reservation is displaying a stopped pattern (counting the stop display time). If it is judged that the variable pattern is being displayed or the stopped pattern is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-85, and if it is judged that the variable pattern is not being displayed and the stopped pattern is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-55.

(Step S610-55)
The main CPU 300a transfers the special 2 reserves stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special symbol reserve storage area to the storage section with the next smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the special 2 reserves stored in the second to fourth storage sections are transferred to the first to third storage sections. The main RAM 300c is also provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the special 2 reserves stored in the 1st storage section are block-transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball count counter corresponding to the special 2 reserve is subtracted by "1," and a reserve subtraction designation command indicating that the special 2 reserve has been subtracted by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-57)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first special symbol display 160 is displaying a changing pattern. If it is judged that the changing pattern is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-63, and if it is judged that the changing pattern is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th memory section and a special symbol probability state flag for identifying whether the game is in a high probability state or a low probability state, selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number judgment table, draws a big role, and executes a special symbol winning judgment process for storing the lottery result.

(Step S610-61)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process to determine a special symbol. Here, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and reserved type transferred to the 0th memory unit are loaded, the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or small win symbol random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol) is saved. Also, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for loss is saved. Then, after the special symbol determination data is saved, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-63)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol finally displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is a jackpot symbol. If it is judged to be a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-65. If it is judged not to be a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S610-65)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the big win determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit is within the range of the small win. If it is judged to be within the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-67, and if it is judged to be outside the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-69.

(Step S610-67)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning pattern random number and reserved type transferred to the 0th memory unit, selects the corresponding small winning pattern random number determination table to extract special pattern determination data, and saves the extracted special pattern determination data (type of small winning pattern).

(Step S610-69)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the losing symbol, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the first special symbol display 160 is performing a variable display of the symbol that will eventually stop and display the big win symbol, the second special symbol display 162 will always perform only the variable display of the symbol that will eventually stop and display the small win symbol or the losing symbol.

(Step S610-71)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stopping symbol numbers corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in the above steps S610-61, S610-67, and S610-69.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variable number determination process for determining a variable pattern number. The details of this special symbol variable number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-73)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-75)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery in the step S611 is a big prize or not, and if it is a big prize, loads the special symbol judgment data saved in the step S610-61 and checks the type of the big prize symbol. Then, referring to the game state setting table and the current game state, it judges the game state, the high probability number of times, and the time-saving number of times to be set after the big prize game ends, and saves the judgment results in the special symbol probability state reserve flag, the time-saving state reserve flag, the high probability number cut reserve counter, and the time-saving number cut reserve counter. Note that if a losing symbol is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-77)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting the special symbol display symbol counter in order to start the variable display of symbols in the second special symbol display 162. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segment display that constitutes the second special symbol display 162, and lighting of the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment that is turned on at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes the number-of-times cut management process described later.

(Step S610-81)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a count command indicating the counter value updated in step S610-79 (the remaining number of times until the high probability count becomes 0).

(Step S610-83)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Step S610-85)
When neither the first special pattern display device 160 nor the second special pattern display device 162 is displaying a changing or stopped pattern, the main CPU 300a executes a predetermined customer waiting process and terminates the special pattern change waiting process.

Figure 37 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol winning determination process (S611) for the simultaneous spin reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the registered setting value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. If it is judged to be within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-11. If it is judged to be not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 03H (abnormal setting status).

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (sub-command) in the transmission buffer and ends the special symbol winning determination process. When this setting abnormal state command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, a notification that a setting abnormality has occurred is issued.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the big win determination random number judgment table corresponding to the information loaded in the above steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower and upper limits for determining whether a big win or a small win has occurred.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit with the above-mentioned lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (big prize lottery) to determine whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 as determination information, and ends the special symbol winning determination process.

Figure 38 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern variable number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the currently set game state and judges whether the normal game state is the time-shortened game state. If it is judged that the normal game state is the time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S612-7, and if it is judged that the normal game state is not the time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S612-5.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination table selection process to select and set a corresponding fluctuation pattern random number determination table based on the current game state, the reserved type, and the type of the determined special pattern.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a increments the total change count counter. The total change count counter counts the total change count obtained by adding up the number of times the first special symbol display 160 changes its symbol display (first change count) and the number of times the second special symbol display 162 changes its symbol display (second change count) after the time-saving game state is set. This total change count is updated by one each time the change display of the symbol starts in the time-saving game state.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether it is the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162. As a result, if it is judged that it is the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162, the process proceeds to step S612-11, and if it is judged that it is not the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162, the process proceeds to step S612-5.

When the first special symbol display 160 starts displaying changing symbols during time-saving play, a random number determination table for changing symbols is selected based on the total number of changes updated in step S612-7 above.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a increments the second variation counter. The second variation counter counts the number of times (second variation count) that the second special symbol display 162 changes the display of the symbols after the time-saving game state is set. When the time-saving game state is set, the second variation count is updated by one each time the second special symbol display 162 starts displaying the symbols.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second change count updated in the above step S612-11 is equal to or less than 4. If it is judged to be equal to or less than 4, the process proceeds to step S612-15, and if it is judged to be not equal to or less than 4, the process proceeds to step S612-5.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, if the second special symbol display 162 starts displaying a changing symbol and the second number of changes is 5 or more, a change pattern random number determination table is selected based on the total number of changes updated in step S612-7 above. According to the table I selected at this time, the change time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a special table as a fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table set in the above step S612-5 or step S612-15 and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S610-9 or step S610-55.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in the above step S612-17 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special pattern variation number determination process.

Figure 39 is a flowchart explaining the cutoff number management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time-saving count, i.e., the counter value of the time-saving count cut-off counter, is greater than 0. As a result, if it is judged that the time-saving count is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and if it is judged that the time-saving count is 0, the time-cut-off management process is terminated.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time-saving cut counter.

(Step S613-5)
In the above step S613-3, the main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value (time-saving count) has been updated to 0. As a result, if it is judged that the time-saving count is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-7, and if it is judged that the time-saving count is not 0, the process for managing the number of times the game has been cut is terminated.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time-saving state flag to set the normal game state to a non-time-saving game state. As a result, after the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, the normal game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state at the start of the change when the change count reaches the time-saving count (here, 50 or 100 times). For example, if it is set to the high probability premonition state, it is set to the most advantageous state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time-saving end flag and ends the number-cut management process.

Figure 40 is a flowchart explaining the processing during special pattern change on the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value. The processing target identification value is used to identify whether the processing for the special 1 reservation or the special 2 reservation is to be performed when each of the following processes is performed. When "00H" is set as the processing target identification value, the processing for the special 1 reservation is performed, and when "01H" is set as the processing target identification value, the processing for the special 2 reservation is performed. Note that the various counters and timers that appear in the explanation of the special pattern variable processing and the special pattern stop pattern display processing are provided for special 1 reservation and special 2 reservation, and the processing in the following steps S620-5 to S620-23 is performed for the processing target (counter, timer, etc.) corresponding to the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the pending processing target is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. If the pending processing target is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S620-5. If the pending processing target is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S620-25.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of updating the special symbol variation base counter. The special symbol variation base counter is set to a counter value that completes one revolution in a predetermined cycle (e.g., 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (e.g., 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, the counter value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in the above step S620-5 is "0". If the counter value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-9, and if the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-13.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol fluctuation timer update process to subtract a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer set in the above step S610-27 or step S610-73.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer updated in the above step S620-9 is "0". If the timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-19, and if the timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-13.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each of the 7-segment segments that make up the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162. Specifically, if the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and if the timer value is "1" or greater, the timer value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current timer value.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". If it judges that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-17, and if it judges that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-25.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and moves the process to step S620-25. As a result, each segment constituting the 7-segment display is sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-25 or S610-71 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command, which indicates that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol variation stop time, which is the time for which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, in a special game timer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). If it is judged that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the processing during the special symbol variation is terminated, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing proceeds to step S620-27.

(Step S620-27)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the processing target identification value, and moves the process to step S620-3.

Figure 41 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process on the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol related to the reserved type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. If it is judged that the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-5, and if it is judged that the special symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S620-23 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S630-37, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S630-7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a miss. If it is judged to be a miss, the process proceeds to step S630-29, and if it is judged not to be a miss, the process proceeds to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. If it is judged that there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S631, and if it is judged that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a symbol forcible stop process, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process to update the game state. Here, if the special symbol currently being stopped is a big win symbol, the game state is set to the initial state, and if the special symbol currently being stopped is a small win symbol, the game state proceeds directly to the next process.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets data in a special electric role activation RAM set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of times that the special electric device operates. Specifically, the data set in step S630-15 is referenced, and a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol=number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the maximum number of times that the special electric device operates. The maximum number of times that the special electric device operates indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big role game that is about to start. Meanwhile, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates, and the current number of rounds is managed by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates at the start of each round game. Here, a process for resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates is also executed with the start of the big role game.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command in the transmission buffer to transmit the start of the big prize game to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" when starting a big win game, and updates the special game management phase to "05H" when starting a small win game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase updated in the above step S630-23 is "01H", i.e., whether a jackpot has been reached. If the special game management phase is judged to be "01H", the process proceeds to step S630-27, and if the special game management phase is not judged to be "01H", the process proceeds to step S630-29.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This process causes a jackpot signal to be output with the start of the big win game (opening). Note that although multiple signals are provided to be output from the game information output terminal board 312, only a specific jackpot signal will be described here.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state confirmation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time-saving end flag is on. As described above, the time-saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 39 at the start of the fluctuation when changing from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state. That is, the time-saving end flag is turned on here when the normal game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state due to the time-saving exit at the start of the 50th or 100th fluctuation in the high probability premonition state. That is, here, the time-saving end flag is judged to be on only when the fluctuation at the time of the time-saving exit ends. If it is judged that the time-saving end flag is on, the process moves to step S630-33, and if it is judged that the time-saving end flag is not on, the process moves to step S630-37.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, the jackpot signal is output during a big win game or a time-saving game state.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time-saving end flag.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). If it is judged that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the process for displaying the special symbol stop symbols is terminated, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the process proceeds to step S630-39.

(Step S630-39)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing object identification value, and moves the process to step S630-3.

Figure 42 is a flowchart explaining the forced pattern stop process (step S631) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the currently displayed special symbol is a small win symbol. If it is judged to be a small win symbol, the process proceeds to step S631-3. If it is judged not to be a small win symbol, the process proceeds to step S631-11.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value is 00H, that is, whether the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. If it is judged that the processing target identification value is 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-11, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-5.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol being changed (the other) is a big win symbol. If it is judged to be a big win symbol, the process proceeds to step S631-11. If it is judged not to be a big win symbol, the process proceeds to step S631-7.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the interruption flag.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation interruption process for interrupting the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, and ends the symbol forced stop process. Here, the main CPU 300a executes a process for temporarily saving the remaining time of the variable time and information related to the special symbols in a predetermined storage area.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a process to forcibly stop a losing symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, which is displaying a changing symbol, and ends the forcible symbol stop process.

When the small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 by the above process, a losing symbol is forcibly displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display 162. Also, when a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display 162, if a big win symbol is being displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 during a variable display in which the big win symbol is finally displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160, a losing symbol is forcibly displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160. On the other hand, when a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display 162, if a small win symbol or a losing symbol is being displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 during a variable display in which the small win symbol or a losing symbol is finally displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160, the variable display on the first special symbol display 160 is temporarily interrupted.

Figure 43 is a flow chart explaining the processing before the opening of the large prize opening in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This processing before the opening of the large prize opening is executed when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S630-19 etc. is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the pre-opening process of the special prize opening, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command to specify opening of the large prize opening to transmit the start of opening of the large prize opening (start of a round of play) to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes a special prize opening/closing switching process, which will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("02H" or "06H"), and ends the pre-opening process for the large prize opening.

Figure 44 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit of the special electric device opening/closing switching count (the number of times the special winning hole is opened and closed during one round of play). If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit, the special winning hole opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the special electric device operation RAM set table and extracts solenoid control data for controlling the supply of electricity to the first large prize opening solenoid 126c and the second large prize opening solenoid 128c, and timer data which is the power supply time or power stop time, based on the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count counter.

(Step S641-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a large prize opening solenoid energization control process to start or stop energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S641-3. By executing this large prize opening solenoid energization control process, the start or stop of energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c is controlled in steps S400-23 and S400-25.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. The timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time of the special prize opening once.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process to start energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c has been performed in the above step S641-5. If it is judged to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S641-11, and if it is judged not to be in the energization start state, the large prize opening opening opening/closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the large prize opening opening/closing switching process.

Figure 45 is a flowchart explaining the special prize opening control process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special prize opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S641-7 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S650-5, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S650-3.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count. If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S650-7, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S641.

(Step S641)
In the above step S650-3, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of the above step S641.

(Step S650-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the large prize opening winning ball counter updated in the above step S500-9 has reached a specified number, that is, whether the large prize opening has the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls in one round. If it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the large prize opening opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a large prize opening closing process required to close the large prize opening by stopping the energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c. As a result, the large prize opening becomes closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the effective time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("03H" or "07H").

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a special prize opening closure command, indicating that the special prize opening has been closed, in the transmission buffer, and ends the special prize opening opening control process.

Figure 46 is a flow chart explaining the large prize opening closure validity process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large prize opening closure validity process is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S650-9 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the special prize opening closure valid processing, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the processing proceeds to step S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation counter matches the counter value of the special electric device maximum operation counter, that is, whether a preset number of rounds of play have been completed. If it is judged that the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation counter matches the counter value of the special electric device maximum operation counter, the process proceeds to step S660-9, and if it is judged that they do not match, the process proceeds to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H". Note that when the special game management phase is 07H, that is, during the control of the small win game, the number of rounds of the small win game is "1", so that the result of the determination in step S660-3 is always YES, and the process does not proceed to that step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the predetermined special prize opening closing time in the special game timer and ends the special prize opening closing validity process, thereby starting the next round of games.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in a special game timer.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H").

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the large prize opening closure activation process.

Figure 47 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large prize opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the waiting process for the end of the special prize slot, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small win game has ended. If it is judged that the special game management phase is "08H", the process proceeds to step S670-11, and if it is judged that the special game management phase is not "08H", the process proceeds to step S670-5.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process to set the game state after the big win game ends. Here, the game state, the number of high probability games, and the number of time-saving games set in the preliminary area in the above step S610-29 or step S610-75 are loaded, and the settings of each flag and the counter value are set as the game state after the big win game.

(Step S670-7)
In step S670-5, the main CPU 300a judges whether the normal game state has been set to the non-time-saving game state. If it is determined that the normal game state has been set to the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S670-9. If it is determined that the normal game state has not been set to the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a big win signal output stop process to stop the big win signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the most advantageous state is set after the big win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped when the big win game ends.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the current game state is a high probability premonition state (high probability game state and time-saving game state). If it is judged to be a high probability premonition state, the process proceeds to step S670-13, and if it is judged not to be a high probability premonition state, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the stopped small winning symbol is the special symbol Z1. If it is judged to be the special symbol Z1, the process proceeds to step S670-15. If it is judged not to be the special symbol Z1, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the time-saving state flag to change the normal game state to a non-time-saving game state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in the high probability premonition state, the game state is changed to the most advantageous state at the end of the small win game.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process to reset the time-saving number counter.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a big win signal output stop process to stop the big win signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the most advantageous state is set after the small win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped when the small win game ends.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a number command corresponding to the number of high probability times and the number of time reduction times in a transmission buffer.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning slot. As a result, if the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

Figure 48 is a diagram explaining the normal game management phase in the simultaneous play reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous play reference example, the processing related to the normal game, which is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball into the normal play opening 125, is executed step by step and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to such normal games by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling the execution of normal games, and each of these normal game control modules is associated with a normal game management phase. Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "01H", a module for executing "normal symbol change process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "03H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening pre-processing" is called, when the normal game management phase is "04H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening opening control process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "05H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening closing valid process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening end wait process" is called.

Figure 49 is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 above and starts processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the control time of the normal game.

Figure 50 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and judges whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol reserved is "0". If it is judged that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a transfers the regular reserved balls (win-determining random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the regular reserved ball storage area in blocks to the storage section with the next smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the regular reserved balls stored in the second to fourth storage sections are transferred to the first to third storage sections. The main RAM 300c is also provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the regular reserved balls stored in the 1st storage section are transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this regular pattern storage area shift process, the counter value of the regular pattern reserved ball count counter is decremented by "1," and a regular reserved reduction command indicating that the regular reserved balls have been decremented by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit, selects a winning determination random number judgment table corresponding to the current game state, performs a regular symbol lottery, and executes a regular symbol winning determination process that stores the lottery result.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. In the simultaneous spin reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a win, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is ultimately turned on. For example, in the case of a win, "0" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a checks the current game state, and selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in the above step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol variation time determined in the above step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal pattern display pattern counter in order to start the variable display of normal patterns in the normal pattern display 168. When the counter value is set to, for example, "0" in the normal pattern display pattern counter, the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned on, and when the counter value is set to "1", the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal pattern display pattern counter at the start of the variable display of normal patterns.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in a transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal symbol designation command in the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stopping symbol number determined in step S710-7 above, i.e., the symbol type (winning symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol winning judgment process.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal pattern change waiting process.

Figure 51 is a flow chart explaining the processing during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This processing during normal symbol fluctuation is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S710-13 is "0". If the timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that measures the light-on and light-off times of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, if the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and if the timer value is "1" or more, the timer value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current timer value.

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S720-7, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the process during the normal symbol variation is terminated.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, it is updated to a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and if the counter value is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, it is updated to a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, and the normal symbol variation process is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on and off repeatedly (blinks) at predetermined intervals over the normal symbol variation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to be turned on or off, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is announced.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern variation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal pattern, in a normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal symbol stop command, which indicates that the stopped display of the normal symbols has begun, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal pattern variation processing.

Figure 52 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in the above step S720-11 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the regular drawing.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the regular drawing is a win or not. If it is judged to be a win, the process proceeds to step S730-9, and if it is judged to be a no win (no win), the process proceeds to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. This ends the normal game management process based on one normal symbol reservation, and if a normal symbol reservation is stored, processing is performed to start the variable display of the next reserved normal symbol.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before normal power release in the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. This starts the opening and closing control of the first variable start opening 120B.

Figure 53 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric device prize opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in the above step S730-9 is "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process, which will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the processing before opening the normal electric device winning opening.

Figure 54 is a flowchart explaining the normal electric role winning opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count (the number of times the movable piece 120b of the first variable start port 120B is opened and closed during one opening/closing control). If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric role winning port opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and extracts solenoid control data (energization control data or energization stop control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 120c based on the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter, and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal electric closing effective time = pause time) of the normal electric role solenoid 120c.

(Step S741-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric role solenoid energization control process to start energizing the normal electric role solenoid 120c or to stop energizing the normal electric role solenoid 120c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S741-3. By executing this normal electric role solenoid energization control process, the normal electric role solenoid 120c is controlled to start or stop energizing in the above step S400-23 and step S400-25.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first variable start port 120B once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal electric role solenoid 120c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process to start energization of the normal electric role solenoid 120c has been performed in the above step S741-5. As a result, if it is judged to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S741-11, and if it is judged not to be in the energization start state, the normal electric role winning port opening/closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

Figure 55 is a flowchart explaining the normal electric device prize opening control process in the main control board 300 for the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric device prize opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S741-7 is not "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S750-5, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S750-3.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count. If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S750-7, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
In the above step S750-3, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of the above step S741.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric device winning ball counter updated in the above step S530-9 has reached a specified number, that is, whether the first variable start opening 120B has received the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls during one opening/closing control. If it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric device winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric role closing process required to stop the power supply to the normal electric role solenoid 120c and close the first variable start port 120B. This causes the first variable start port 120B to be in a closed state.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power effective state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric device winning port opening control process.

Figure 56 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device prize opening closure enable process in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric device prize opening closure enable process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S750-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning port closure valid processing is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the processing proceeds to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric device winning port closure validation processing.

Figure 57 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric role winning slot end wait process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric role winning slot end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning port end wait process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric role winning port end wait process. As a result, if a normal symbol reservation is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol will be resumed. Next, as a reference example of the performance, specific performances that can be executed in the above-mentioned one-type gaming machine, one-type two-type gaming machine, and simultaneous spinning machine and specific processing related to the performance will be described.

<Example of performance>
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation performance of the no-reach variation pattern according to the reference performance example. As described above, when the big role lottery is performed in the main control board 300, during the variation display of the special symbol, that is, during the variation time of the special symbol, a variation performance is executed to notify the result of the big role lottery. In this variation performance, various background images are displayed in the main performance display section 200a, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background images. During the variation performance, sound is output from the audio output device 206 in accordance with the image displayed in the main performance display section 200a, and the performance lighting device 204 is controlled to light up, and the performance role device 202 is controlled to move, but detailed explanations are omitted here.

The variable performances in the reference performance examples are broadly divided into a no-reach variable pattern and a reach variable pattern. In the variable performance of the no-reach variable pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner superimposed on this background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed stationary in a combination that indicates that the big role lottery result was a miss. In this state, when a new special pattern is displayed, as the display of the special pattern starts, the three performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c start to display (scroll) as shown in FIG. 58(b). Note that the downward white arrow in the figure indicates that the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed scrolling in the vertical direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), first, the effect pattern 210a is displayed as a stopped pattern, and then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the effect pattern 210c, which is different from the effect pattern 210a, is displayed as a stopped pattern. Then, at approximately the same timing as the special pattern stops being displayed as a stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 160 or the second special pattern display device 162 after the variable display of the special pattern, the effect pattern 210b is displayed as a stopped pattern, as shown in FIG. 58(e), and the result of the big prize lottery is notified to the player based on the final stopped display state of the three effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

Figure 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of a normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance according to a performance reference example. In the performance reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is broadly divided into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, an advanced reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance, similar to the non-reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance, the fluctuation display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c begins with the start of the fluctuation display of the special pattern, and as shown in Figure 59 (a), the performance pattern 210a is first displayed frozen. After that, as shown in Figure 59 (b), the performance pattern 210c, which is the same as the performance pattern 210a, is displayed frozen.

In this way, when the same performance symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in a reach state in the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 59(c), "reach" is displayed superimposed on the performance symbols 210a, 210c in the main performance display section 200a. Note that there are multiple types of reach states, and the same performance symbols 210a, 210c with any of the numbers "1" to "9" written on them are displayed in a stopped state. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(d), the shape of the performance symbols 210a, 210c is changed from that before the reach state and the variable display continues. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a, 210c is displayed in a stopped state, and the player is notified that the result of the big role lottery was a miss.

Figure 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a miss according to the performance reference example, and Figure 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big win according to the performance reference example. As shown in Figures 60(a)-(d) and 61(a)-(d), the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern is similar to the variation presentation of the normal reach variation pattern, in which the performance patterns 210a and 210c are displayed in a reach state in the main performance display section 200a, and then a reach development presentation in which a predetermined development image (video) is played and displayed is executed. In this reach development presentation, for example, as shown in Figures 60(e) and 61(e), a mission is displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and as shown in Figures 60(f), (g) and 61(f), (g), an image toward the achievement of the mission is displayed.

Here, the development images for reach development effects are broadly divided into miss patterns and big win patterns, and in the development image for the miss pattern, as shown in FIG. 60(h), an image indicating failure of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a miss. On the other hand, in the development image for the big win pattern, as shown in FIG. 61(h), an image indicating success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 61(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a big win.

The reach development effects include, for example, mission effects in which development images of mission challenges are displayed, and battle effects in which development images of friendly characters and enemy characters battling each other are displayed, as described above. The mission effects have a number of execution patterns that differ in the mission content, and the battle effects have a number of execution patterns that differ in the characters that appear and the methods of fighting. As described above, the execution patterns of the mission effects are broadly divided into big win patterns in which the mission is accomplished and failure patterns in which the mission is failed, and the execution patterns of the battle effects are similarly broadly divided into big win patterns in which the friendly character triumphs over the enemy character and failure patterns in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character.

The big win pattern and the losing pattern are composed of the same content until the end of the performance, and differ in whether the friendly character ultimately wins or loses, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. Therefore, during the reach development performance, the player cannot discern the result of the big role lottery until the end of the variable performance, which gives the player a sense of expectation of a big win.

The big win pattern is selected only if the big win lottery result is a big win, and the miss pattern is selected only if the big win lottery result is a miss. However, the reach development effect may be executed twice in one variable performance, in which case the first reach development effect is executed as a miss pattern, and the second reach development effect is executed as a miss pattern or a big win pattern. The flow of the performance when the reach development effect is executed twice in one variable performance is explained below.

Figure 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable performance when the reach development performance relating to the reference performance example is executed twice. For example, after performance patterns 210a, 210c are displayed in a reach state, a mission performance is executed as shown in Figures 62(a) and (b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development performance is executed only once in one variable performance, but immediately after it is notified that the mission has not been completed, "REACH UP" is displayed on the main performance display section 200a as shown in Figure 62(c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the main performance display section 200a displays a battle performance development image, and the second reach development performance starts. This battle performance development image shows a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and when a jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 62(e), the ally character finally wins against the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 62(f), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot is lost, as shown in FIG. 62(g), the ally character finally loses to the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 62(h), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a loss.

Figure 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pseudo-successive reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance according to the performance reference example. As shown in Figure 63 (a), when the display of the fluctuation of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c starts, as shown in Figure 63 (b), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of multiple types of pseudo patterns that have been set up in advance. In this pseudo pattern, for example, the same performance symbols 210a and 210b and the performance symbol 210c with a number "2" larger than the performance symbols 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped in a pseudo mode, the display of the changing performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is resumed, as shown in FIG. 63(c). In other words, the pseudo mode can be said to indicate a re-changing display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. After that, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped again in a pseudo mode, as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(e), when the display of the varying effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c resumes, as shown in FIG. 63(f), the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a reach state, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(g)-(i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the developed reach variation pattern, and the result of the big prize lottery is notified to the player.

In this way, the pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern's fluctuation performance differs from the advanced reach fluctuation pattern's fluctuation performance in the content until the performance patterns 210a, 210c reach the state, and after the state is reached, the fluctuation performance progresses in the same way as the advanced reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern, multiple fluctuation display patterns of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c until the reach state is reached are provided, and the number of tentative stop displays of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, in other words, the number of times that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed, differs for each fluctuation display pattern. This fluctuation display pattern is determined by the fluctuation mode command, and the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode command when the jackpot is won and when it is lost is set so that the more the number of tentative stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, the higher the possibility (hereinafter referred to as "reliability") that a jackpot will ultimately be announced.

Specifically, if the result of the big role lottery is a big win, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display counts is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display counts, and if the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display counts is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display counts.

In addition, the main control board 300 is set so that the reliability of the pseudo-successive reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the reliability of the extended reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is indicated by the number of tentative stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player will watch the progress of the performance, hoping for more tentative stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c.

The execution pattern of the above-mentioned variable performance is determined and controlled by the sub-control board 330 based on the variable performance pattern command determined by the main control board 300. In other words, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable performance is determined in cooperation between the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330.

Figure 64 is a diagram explaining the variable performance determination table related to the performance reference example, where Figure 64 (a) shows the first half variable performance determination table, and Figure 64 (b) shows the second half variable performance determination table. As described above, when the main control board 300 performs a big role lottery, a variable pattern command is determined based on the result of the big role lottery, and each determined command is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives a variable mode command, it obtains a random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the first half variable performance determination table to determine the execution pattern of the variable performance of the first half based on the obtained random number and the received variable mode command. Also, when a variable pattern command is received, it obtains a random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the second half variable performance determination table to determine the execution pattern of the variable performance of the second half based on the obtained random number and the received variable pattern command. Note that Figure 64 shows only a part of the first half variable performance determination table and the second half variable performance determination table.

As shown in FIG. 64, according to the first half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variable performance is set for each variable mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the second half variable performance is set for each variable pattern number (variation pattern command). Then, one variable performance is executed by combining and executing the execution patterns of the first and second half variable performances that have been determined.

The no-reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed when "none" is determined as the execution pattern of the first half, indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, and "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" corresponding to the no-reach fluctuation pattern is determined as the execution pattern of the second half. For example, when a fluctuation mode command corresponding to the fluctuation mode number "01H", indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, is received, the sub-control board 330 always determines "none" as the execution pattern of the first half. In addition, at this time, the selection ratio is set in the second half fluctuation performance determination table so that only one of "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" is determined as the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time. Therefore, by determining "none" as the execution pattern of the first half and determining "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" as the execution pattern of the second half, the execution pattern of the fluctuation performance is determined to be the no-reach fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, the reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed when a pattern other than "none" is determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and one of the reach development performances (shown as developments 1 to 5 in the figure) is determined as the execution pattern for the second half. In other words, when the reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed in the main performance display unit 200a, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to a fluctuation mode number other than the fluctuation mode number = 01H is always received, and a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a fluctuation pattern number that determines one of developments 1 to 5 is received.

Here, in FIG. 64(a), "Normal Reach 1" and "Normal Reach 2" in the execution pattern of the first half respectively indicate the background image and the variable display pattern of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c displayed on the main performance display section 200a until the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c reach the reach state, or more specifically, until the reach development performance starts, among the variable performances of the normal reach variable pattern. These image patterns are designed in advance to match the variable display time of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number, and for example, when "Normal Reach 1" is determined, the images shown in FIG. 59(a)-(d) will be displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 64(a), "pseudo 2a" and the like in the execution pattern in the first half indicate the display pattern of the main change performance image displayed on the main performance display unit 200a until the reach development performance starts, among the change performances of the pseudo continuous reach change pattern, that is, the execution pattern of the pattern display performance in which the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed changeably. For example, "pseudo 2a" indicates that the pseudo continuous reach change pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the change display number of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is two, and the main change performance image is display pattern a. Also, "pseudo 3b" indicates that the pseudo continuous reach change pattern of "pseudo 3" in which the change display number of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is three, and the main change performance image is display pattern b.

In the first half variation presentation decision table and second half variation presentation decision table shown in FIG. 64, the selection ratio is set so that the variation presentation of the no-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is a miss. Also, the developed reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both when there is a miss and when there is a jackpot, but the selection ratio of the developed reach variation pattern is set higher when there is a miss and lower when there is a jackpot than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern. In this way, by setting the selection ratio when there is a miss and when there is a jackpot, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to have a higher reliability than the developed reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, within the pseudo-sequential reach fluctuation pattern, the more the number of pseudos, the higher the selection rate for a big win and the lower the selection rate for a miss, so that the more the number of pseudos, the higher the reliability.

As described above, the general flow of the variable performance is determined by the variable performance determination table, but at the start of the variable performance, the possibility of executing various element performances that make up the variable performance and the execution pattern are further determined based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Here, element performance refers to all performances that make up the variable performance, such as the variable display of performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c on the main performance display unit 200a, the development image displayed on the main performance display unit 200a in the reach development performance, and even the performance that moves the performance role device 202, as described above. In the embodiment, preview performances (suggested performances) are executed at various times during the variable performance as element performances that make up the variable performance.

This preview performance is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the main performance display section 200a and the performance role device 202 is moved at a predetermined timing when the fluctuation performance starts, when the fluctuation patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed again in the fluctuation performance of the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern, and even during the reach development performance, and the possibility of execution and the execution pattern are determined for each preview performance. Each preview performance has multiple types of execution patterns, and for each of the multiple types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each fluctuation pattern command or fluctuation mode command, in other words, for each possibility of winning the jackpot, and an expected value is set for each execution pattern based on this selection ratio.

As described above, when the sub-control board 330 receives a variation pattern command, the execution pattern of the variation performance and whether or not each element performance can be executed and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation performance is executed while the special pattern is being displayed. In this way, the variation performance is executed once for each special pattern variation display, but in the embodiment, a performance spanning multiple special pattern variation displays is also executed.

Figure 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display effect related to a reference example of the effect. A hold display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main effect display section 200a. Although not shown in Figures 58 to 63, the hold display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display section 200a even during variable effects and while waiting to play. During variable effects, a hold display effect is performed in this hold display area 211. In the hold display effect, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read into the processing area (0th memory section) during the big role lottery, the first hold display 212b, the second hold display 212c, the third hold display 212d, and the fourth hold display 212e indicating the holds stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first special chart hold memory area, respectively, are displayed in the hold display area 211. In the following, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to fourth hold display 212e will be collectively referred to as hold display 212.

For example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 reserved symbols are stored in the main RAM 300c, the reserved symbol 212a and the first reserved symbol 212b to the fourth reserved symbol 212e, a total of five reserved symbols 212, are displayed in the reserved display area 211 as shown in FIG. 65(a). Then, when the display of the special symbol is terminated from this state, the special 1 reserved symbol stored in the first memory unit is read into the processing area (the 0th memory unit) and a large role lottery is performed, and the reserved shift processing of the main RAM 300c is executed, the reserved symbol 212a is erased and the first reserved symbol 212b to the fourth reserved symbol 212e are moved one position to the left as shown in FIG. 65(b). Furthermore, when the next special 1 reserved symbol is read from this state, each reserved symbol 212 is further moved as shown in FIG. 65(c). In this way, the hold display effect is an effect that notifies the player of the number of special 1 holds stored in the main RAM 300c.

In addition, multiple display patterns of the reserved display 212 are provided, and the display color is different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when a reserved is stored, the acquisition time performance determination process (step S536) is executed, and a look-ahead designation command indicating the variable information to be determined when the newly stored reserved is read out to the 0th storage unit is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the sub-control board 330 determines the display pattern of the reserved display corresponding to the newly stored reserved based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variable information to be determined when the newly stored reserved is read out in the big role lottery. In other words, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to the possibility of winning a jackpot and the execution pattern of the variable performance, the display pattern of the reserved display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot.

Figure 66 (a) is a diagram explaining the final pending display pattern determination table, and Figure 66 (b) is a diagram explaining the previous pending display pattern determination table. As described above, in the acquisition time performance determination process in the main control board 300, a look-ahead designation command indicating the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the newly stored pending is read out is sent to the sub-control board 330. In other words, the look-ahead designation command is a command that transmits the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the pending is read out to the sub-control board 330. According to the final pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 is set for each look-ahead designation command (variation pattern number), and when a look-ahead designation command is received, the final display pattern of the pending display 212, i.e., the final display pattern of the pending display 212a, is determined.

According to the final hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66(a), one of eight display patterns is determined: "default (white)", "flashing", "blue", "yellow", "green", "black", "red", and "premium (rainbow)". Then, once the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the hold display 212 displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66(b). According to this previous hold display pattern determination table, a selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the hold display 212.

For example, when a hold is stored in the second memory section of the first special chart hold memory area in the main control board 300, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined by referring to the final hold display pattern determination table. In this case, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is then determined by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the previously determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a. For example, if the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is "blue," then according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined to be "blinking" with a probability of 200/250, and "blue" with a probability of 50/250.

Once the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined in this manner, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is then determined based on the previously determined display pattern of the first hold display 212b, again by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table.

As described above, when a hold is stored, first the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, and so on, in a manner that works backwards in the display order. Note that, according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only a display pattern that is the same as the previously determined hold display 212 display pattern or one with a low reliability is determined.

As described above, in the hold display presentation, multiple display patterns are provided for the hold display 212, each of which has a different expected value for the award of a predetermined gaming profit. From the time the hold display 212 is first displayed on the main presentation display section 200a until it is finally erased, the hold display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern, or the display pattern may change during the display period.

In the reference example, the timing when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes can be broadly divided into when the newly stored special hold 1 (hereinafter also referred to as the target hold) is moved to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d, and when the target change display related to the target hold is in progress.

Next, we will explain the processing in the sub-control board 330 to execute the above-mentioned variable performance. Note that, in the following, we will omit explanations of the processing in the sub-control board 330 that is not related to the variable performance.

(Sub-CPU Initialization Processing of the Sub-Control Board 330)
FIG. 67 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 relating to the reference example of performance.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub-ROM 330b, and initializes and sets flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub-CPU 330a performs a process of updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeats the process of step S1000-3 until an interrupt process is performed. Note that multiple types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330)
68 is a flow chart for explaining the sub timer interrupt process (S1100) of the sub control board 330 according to the reference example. The sub control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). When the reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub CPU 330a reads a timer interrupt process program and starts the sub timer interrupt process.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the registers.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub-CPU 330a performs processing for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs update processing of various timer counters used in the sub-control board 330. Here, unless otherwise specified, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the decrement stops when the counter reaches 0.

(Step S1200)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 330c, and performs various processes according to the received command. When a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 performs a command reception interrupt process, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the receive buffer. Here, the command stored in the receive buffer is analyzed by the command reception interrupt process.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a time schedule management process that refers to a time table and executes a process corresponding to the time stored in the time table. Here, based on the time data set in the time table, various flags are turned on or off, or commands are sent to each performance device, thereby controlling the execution of each performance, including variable performance and major role performance.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub-CPU 330a restores the registers and ends the sub-timer interrupt process.

Figure 69 is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception process for the reference performance example that is executed when a look-ahead designation command is received, part of the command analysis process. As described above, the look-ahead designation command (look-ahead designation variable pattern command) is set in the main control board 300 in the performance determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536-11 in Figure 30), and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (step S100-65 in Figure 20).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub-CPU 330a first analyzes the received read-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub-CPU 330a stores the advance judgment information based on the analysis result of the above step S1210-1. The sub-RAM 330c of the sub-control board 330 is provided with a first advance judgment information storage section corresponding to the first special chart reserved storage area of the main control board 300, and a second advance judgment information storage section corresponding to the second special chart reserved storage area. The first advance judgment information storage section has four storage sections, the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first advance judgment information storage section correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special chart reserved storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second advance judgment information storage section has four storage sections, the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second advance judgment information storage section correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special chart reserved storage area, respectively. Here, the pre-determination information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the memory section in which the newly reserved item is stored, among the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first special chart reservation memory area or the second special chart reservation memory area of the main control board 300.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a final hold display pattern determination process to determine the final display pattern of the hold display 212. Here, based on the received look-ahead designation command, the final hold display pattern determination table (FIG. 66(a)) is referenced, and the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined and stored.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub-CPU 330a derives the number of times to determine the display pattern of the reserved display 212, i.e., the change timing of the reserved display 212, based on the storage unit in which the reserved is stored, and determines the display pattern of the reserved display 212 by referring to the previous reserved display pattern determination table (FIG. 66(b)) for the derived number of times. Then, the display pattern information of the reserved display 212 thus determined is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process proceeds to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, the sub-CPU 330a performs a hold display start process to start displaying the hold display 212, and ends the read-ahead designation command reception process. As a result, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

Figure 70 is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern command receiving process executed when a variation pattern command is received, as part of the command analysis process for the reference performance example. As described above, the variation pattern command is set in the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612-19 in Figure 38) in the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (step S100-65 in Figure 20).

(Step S1220-1)
When the variation pattern command is received, the sub-CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in the above step S1000-3, and determines and stores the execution pattern of the variable performance in the latter half based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis result in the above step S1220-1.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variation mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in the above step S1000-3, and determines and stores the execution pattern of the variable performance for the first half based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis result in the above step S1220-5.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub-CPU 330a obtains the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each preview performance, and based on the obtained performance random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5, refers to each preview performance decision table to determine whether or not to execute each preview performance and the execution pattern, and stores the same.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a shift process to shift the pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage unit. Here, when starting a variable performance based on the special 1 reservation, the pre-determination information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the first pre-determination information storage unit is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the first pre-determination information storage unit, respectively, and when starting a variable performance based on the special 2 reservation, the pre-determination information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a reserved display shift process to move and display the reserved display 212. In addition, when the display pattern of the reserved display 212 is to be changed, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub-CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the determination of each step above, and ends the variable pattern command receiving process. Based on the time table set here, in the above step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable performance on the main performance display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the performance lighting device 204, and other performance execution control are performed.

<Example>
Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following, changes from the above-mentioned reference example will be described. In the embodiment described below, unless otherwise specified, it is the same as the above-mentioned reference example, and the same configurations and processes as the above-mentioned reference example are given the same reference symbols as the reference example, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 71 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 according to an embodiment. The gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment is provided with a first starting hole 120 arranged at a position where a gaming ball that has entered the first gaming area 116a can enter, and two second starting holes 122 where a gaming ball that has entered the second gaming area 116b can enter. The two second starting holes 122 have the same function, and when a gaming ball enters either of the second starting holes 122, one gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball and a special second reserve can be obtained. Hereinafter, in the second gaming area 116b, the second starting hole 122 located relatively higher is referred to as the upper second starting hole 122, and the second starting hole 122 located relatively lower is referred to as the lower second starting hole 122.

Figure 72 is a partially enlarged view of the second game area 116b. The lower second starting hole 122 is located near the bottom of the second game area 116b. The second game area 116b is provided with various winning holes, which will be described later, but almost all game balls that reach the bottom of the second game area 116b without entering any of the winning holes will enter the lower second starting hole 122.

The second game area 116b is also provided with a normal electric winning opening 123. The normal electric winning opening 123 is open at the top, and a movable piece 123b is provided in this opening. The movable piece 123b can appear and disappear in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 108, and is normally held in a closed position protruding from the front side of the game board 108. When the movable piece 123b is held in the closed position, the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed, and it is not possible for a game ball to enter the normal electric winning opening 123.

On the other hand, similar to the simultaneous reference example above, when a winning combination occurs during normal play, the movable piece 123b moves to an open position retracted into the rear side of the game board 108. When the movable piece 123b moves to the open position, the opening of the normal electric winning hole 123 is opened, allowing game balls to enter the normal electric winning hole 123. The upper second starting hole 122 is provided within the normal electric winning hole 123, and all game balls that enter the normal electric winning hole 123 enter the upper second starting hole 122.

Moveable piece 123b is inclined so that the left end is located slightly higher than the right end when viewed from the front of gaming machine 100. When movable piece 123b is in the closed position, game balls flowing down second game area 116b fall onto movable piece 123b. Game balls that fall onto movable piece 123b roll slowly on movable piece 123b. If movable piece 123b moves to the open position during this time, the game ball on movable piece 123b enters normal electric winning hole 123.

The game ball rolls on the movable piece 123b for, for example, about 1 to 3 seconds. If the movable piece 123b does not move to the open position during this time, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 123b flows downward from the right side of the movable piece 123b into the second game area 116b.

Then, a large prize opening 126 is provided between the normal electric prize opening 123 and the second starting opening 122 below. In the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment, one large prize opening 126 is provided. This large prize opening 126 is provided with an opening/closing door 126b that can be opened and closed, and when the opening/closing door 126b is closed, it is not possible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 126. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 126b is open, it is possible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 126.

Figure 73 is a diagram illustrating the internal structure of the large prize opening 126. A structure 126x that protrudes from the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 126x has an opening formed at the top, which becomes the large prize opening 126. An opening/closing door 126b is provided at the top of the structure 126x, and as shown in Figure 73(a), the opening/closing door 126b is normally maintained in a closed state that closes the large prize opening 126.

The opening and closing door 126b protrudes into the second game area 116b so as to face above the gaming machine 100. Therefore, when the opening and closing door 126b is maintained in a closed state, the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b roll on the opening and closing door 126b. Here, the opening and closing door 126b maintained in a closed state is inclined so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the opening and closing door 126b is in a closed state, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 73(a), the game balls that have fallen onto the opening and closing door 126b will slowly roll from right to left on the opening and closing door 126b.

When a big win game is executed, the opening and closing door 126b transitions to an open state that opens the big win opening 126. Here, the opening and closing door 126b appears and disappears in the front and rear directions of the gaming machine 100 from a hole formed in the gaming board 108 by an actuator (solenoid) not shown, as shown in FIG. 73(b).

Normally, the actuator is kept in a non-energized state, and the opening/closing door 126b is held in a position protruding further forward than the hole in the game board 108, closing the large prize opening 126. Then, when the actuator is energized, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the opening/closing door 126b is held in a position recessed further back than the hole in the game board 108, and the large prize opening 126 is opened. In this way, when the large prize opening 126 is open, the game ball enters the large prize opening 126.

The inside of the large prize opening 126 is provided with a lead-out path 126d. The bottom of the large prize opening 126 is inclined so that the game ball that enters the large prize opening 126 is led to the lead-out path 126d. The lead-out path 126d is provided with a special probability area 140a and a non-special probability area 140d, which are holes through which the game ball can pass, and is configured so that the game ball that enters the large prize opening 126 passes through either the special probability area 140a or the non-special probability area 140d and is discharged to the back side of the game board 108.

The large prize opening 126 is provided with a movable member 140b that opens and closes the variable probability area 140a and the non-variable probability area 140d. This movable member 140b can be moved (slid) to switch between a state in which the game ball can enter the variable probability area 140a and a state in which the game ball cannot enter the variable probability area 140a. More specifically, when the movable member 140b is moved to the position shown in FIG. 73(c), the non-variable probability area 140d is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the variable probability area 140a.

On the other hand, when the movable member 140b is shifted to the position shown in FIG. 73(d), the variable probability area 140a is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the non-variable probability area 140d. As will be described in detail later, if a game ball enters the variable probability area 140a during a specific round of play in a big role game (hereinafter referred to as a specific round game), the game state after the end of the big role game is set to a high probability game state, and if a game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the game state after the end of the big role game is set to a low probability game state.

Returning to FIG. 72, a gate 124 is provided above the normal electric winning opening 123. Also, a first non-electric winning device 127 and a second non-electric winning device 129 are provided in the second play area 116b. The first non-electric winning device 127 includes a first non-electric winning opening 127a and a movable piece 127b that opens and closes the first non-electric winning opening 127a, and the second non-electric winning device 129 includes a second non-electric winning opening 129a and a movable piece 129b that opens and closes the second non-electric winning opening 129a.

The movable piece 127b transitions to an open state when a game ball enters the upper second starting opening 122, and transitions to a closed state when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a. Similarly, the movable piece 129b transitions to an open state when a game ball enters the upper second starting opening 122, and transitions to a closed state when two game balls enter the second non-electric winning opening 129a.

Figure 74 is a diagram explaining the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129. In Figure 74 and Figures 75 and 76 described below, the structure of the back side of the game board 108 as viewed from the front side of the game board 108 is shown in solid lines, and the structure of the front side of the game board 108 is shown in dashed lines. Figure 74 also shows the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 in a closed state. A game ball drop passage 144 is provided on the back of the game board 108. All game balls that enter the upper second starting hole 122 are guided to the game ball drop passage 144. The game ball drop passage 144 extends downward from the upper second starting hole 122, and the game ball that enters the upper second starting hole 122 falls downward through the game ball drop passage 144 due to its own weight on the rear side of the game board 108.

The first non-electric winning device 127 includes the first non-electric winning port 127a and the movable piece 127b, as well as a collision plate 127c, a gear mechanism 127d, a swinging plate 127e, a locking member 127f, and a biasing member 127g. The collision plate 127c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and is hit by the game balls that fall from the second starting port 122 above.

The gear mechanism 127d has three gears that mesh with each other. Here, the three gears that make up the gear mechanism 127d are called the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear, from the left in FIG. 74. A collision plate 127c is attached to the rotation shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 127c rotate together.

The third gear has a rotating shaft provided with an oscillating plate 127e. The third gear has a rotating shaft that penetrates the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108. A movable piece 127b is attached to the third gear's rotating shaft at a portion that protrudes further forward than the game board 108. The third gear, the oscillating plate 127e, and the movable piece 127b therefore rotate together. The third gear's rotating shaft is provided to the lower left of the first non-electric winning port 127a, and a locking member 127f is provided to the right of the third gear's rotating shaft, maintaining a gap.

The locking member 127f is provided so that it can swing around the right end of the figure. A biasing member 127g, which is, for example, a tension spring, is attached to the locking member 127f. The locking member 127f is usually held in a roughly horizontal direction by the biasing member 127g, as shown in FIG. 74.

The second non-electric winning device 129 is provided below the first non-electric winning device 127. In addition to the second non-electric winning port 129a and the movable piece 129b, the second non-electric winning device 129 includes a collision plate 129c, a gear mechanism 129d, a swinging plate 129e, a locking member 129f, and a biasing member 129g. The collision plate 129c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and is hit by the game balls that fall from the second starting port 122 above.

The gear mechanism 129d has three gears that mesh with each other. Here, the three gears that make up the gear mechanism 129d are called the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear, from the left in FIG. 74. A collision plate 129c is attached to the rotation shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 129c rotate together.

The third gear has a rotating shaft provided with an oscillating plate 129e. The third gear has a rotating shaft that passes through the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108. A movable piece 129b is attached to the third gear's rotating shaft at a portion that protrudes further forward than the game board 108. The third gear, the oscillating plate 129e, and the movable piece 129b therefore rotate together. The third gear's rotating shaft is provided to the lower left of the second non-electric winning port 129a, and a locking member 129f is provided to the right of the third gear's rotating shaft, maintaining a gap.

The locking member 129f is provided so that it can swing around the right end of the figure. A biasing member 129g, which is, for example, a tension spring, is attached to the locking member 129f. The locking member 129f is usually held in a roughly horizontal direction by the biasing member 129g, as shown in FIG. 74.

Figure 75 is a first diagram explaining the operation of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129, and Figure 76 is a second diagram explaining the operation of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129. The game ball that enters the upper second starting hole 122 collides with the collision plates 127c, 129c as it falls through the game ball fall passage 144. When the game ball collides with the collision plates 127c, 129c, it rotates the first gear of the gear mechanism 127d, 129d as shown in Figure 75.

When the first gear rotates, the second gear and the third gear rotate. The rotation of the third gear causes the oscillating plates 127e, 129e to rotate counterclockwise around the rotation axis of the third gear. Here, in FIG. 75, the second non-electric winning device 129 is shown in an open state, and the first non-electric winning device 127 is shown in an intermediate stage of movement from a closed state to an open state. When the collision plates 127c, 129c and the oscillating plates 127e, 129e rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball falling through the game ball falling passage 144, the tips of the oscillating plates 127e, 129e come into contact with the locking members 127f, 129f.

The oscillating plates 127e, 129e continue to rotate counterclockwise while pushing the left ends of the locking members 127f, 129f upward. Then, when the oscillating plates 127e, 129e reach a predetermined angle, contact with the locking members 127f, 129f is released, and the locking members 127f, 129f return to their original positions. When the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 are in the open state, they are opened like the movable piece 129b shown in Figure 75, and game balls can enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 are in the open state, a game ball flowing down the second game area 116b enters the second non-electric winning port 129a. At this time, the game ball that entered the second non-electric winning port 129a is guided onto the oscillating plate 129e on the back side of the game board 108. When the game ball is placed on the oscillating plate 129e, the weight of the game ball causes the oscillating plate 129e to rotate in a clockwise direction, and the oscillating plate 129e comes into contact with the locking member 129f from above.

A force that rotates the rocking plate 129e in a counterclockwise direction acts on the locking member 129f, but at the same time, a clockwise biasing force acts on the biasing member 129g. At this time, the elastic force of the biasing member 129g is set to be roughly balanced with the weight of one game ball. Therefore, as in the second non-electric winning device 129 in Figure 76, when one game ball is placed on the rocking plate 129e, the rocking plate 129e is locked by the locking member 129f, and clockwise rotation is suppressed.

When two or more game balls are placed on the oscillating plate 127e as in the first non-electric winning device 127 in FIG. 76, the weight of the game balls causes the oscillating plate 127e to rotate clockwise. As a result, the game ball that entered the first non-electric winning port 127a falls downward, and the first non-electric winning device 127 transitions to the closed state shown in FIG. 74.

As described above, the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 transition from a closed state to an open state when one game ball enters the upper second starting opening 122. Then, when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a, respectively, they transition from an open state to a closed state. In other words, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when one game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123, a total of four game balls can enter the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129.

The above-mentioned configurations of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 are merely examples. There are no particular limitations on the structure, so long as the first non-electric winning port 127a or the second non-electric winning port 129a is opened based on a game ball that has entered the second starting port 122 or the normal electric winning port 123. Also, for example, the first non-electric winning port 127a or the second non-electric winning port 129a may be opened when two or more game balls enter the second starting port 122 or the normal electric winning port 123.

In addition, in the embodiment, when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning port 127a or the second non-electric winning port 129a, the first non-electric winning device 127 or the second non-electric winning device 129 transitions to a closed state. However, when one game ball enters or when three or more game balls enter, the first non-electric winning device 127 or the second non-electric winning device 129 may also transition to a closed state.

Furthermore, only one of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 may be provided, or a total of three or more first non-electric winning devices 127 and second non-electric winning devices 129 may be provided. When multiple first non-electric winning devices 127 or second non-electric winning devices 129 are provided, the number of game balls that can be won in one opening may be different from each other.

Figure 77 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control means for controlling the progress of the game in the embodiment. The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, a first starting hole detection switch 120s for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 120, two second starting hole detection switches 122s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 122, a gate detection switch 124s for detecting that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a large winning hole detection switch 126 for detecting that a game ball has entered the large winning hole 126, and a large winning hole detection switch 128s for detecting that a game ball has entered the large winning hole 126. A large prize opening detection switch 126s that detects when a game ball has entered the first non-electric prize opening 127a, a first non-electric prize opening detection switch 127s that detects when a game ball has entered the second non-electric prize opening 129a, and a special probability area detection switch 140s that detects when a game ball has entered the special probability area 140a are connected, and detection signals are input from each of these detection switches to the main control board 300.

Although not shown in the figure, the second start port detection switch 122s is provided on the upper second start port 122 and the lower second start port 122, respectively.

The main control board 300 is also connected to a normal electric role solenoid 123c that operates the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123, a large winning opening solenoid 126c that operates the opening and closing door 126b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 126, and a movable member solenoid 140c that operates the movable member 140b that opens and closes the special prize area 140a, so that the main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the normal electric winning opening 123, the large winning opening 126, and the special prize area 140a. The configuration of the other control means is the same as that of the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

Figure 78 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table according to an embodiment. The low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table according to an embodiment is used in place of the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, a jackpot determination random number judgment table is selected according to the game state when the big prize lottery is started, and the big prize lottery is performed using the selected jackpot determination random number judgment table and the obtained jackpot determination random number.

When starting the lottery for the special 1 reserve and special 2 reserve in a low probability game state, the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table is referenced. Here, in the embodiment, six setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table is provided for each setting value. During play, the setting value is set to one of the six levels, and the lottery for the big prize is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table corresponding to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer).

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 78 (a). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10312, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is approximately 1/210.0.

When the game is in a low probability state and the set value is set to 2 to 6, the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f shown in Figures 78 (b) to (f). According to these low probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/204.8 to 1/186.1, respectively.

Figure 79 is a diagram explaining the random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot in the embodiment. The random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot in the embodiment is used in place of the random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot in the simultaneous spin reference example described above. When starting a lottery for the special 1 reserve and the special 2 reserve in a high probability game state, the random number judgment table for determining a high probability jackpot is referenced.

When the game is in a high probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the high probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 79 (a). According to this high probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10384, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is approximately 1/170.6.

When the game is in a high probability state and the setting value is set to 2 to 6, the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f shown in Figures 79 (b) to (f). According to these high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/167.1 to 1/154.5, respectively.

In this way, unlike the simultaneous spin reference example, the embodiment does not provide a small win, but only a big win. However, like the simultaneous spin reference example, the embodiment may also provide a small win. Also, here, the probability of winning a big win in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state differs depending on the registered setting value, but only the probability of winning a big win in either the low probability game state or the high probability game state may differ depending on the registered setting value. Furthermore, the registered setting value is not required, and the probability of winning a big win in the low probability game state and the high probability game state may always be constant.

Figure 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol random number judgment table according to the embodiment. The winning symbol random number judgment table according to the embodiment is used in place of the winning symbol random number judgment table according to the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the judgment result of "jackpot" is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of special symbol is determined by the obtained winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number judgment table. At this time, if the "jackpot" is won by the special 1 reservation, the special 1 winning symbol random number judgment table is selected as shown in Figure 80 (a), and if the "jackpot" is won by the special 2 reservation, the special 2 winning symbol random number judgment table is selected as shown in Figure 80 (b).

According to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 80(a) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 80(b), the jackpot symbol (special symbols A to D) is determined as the special symbol according to the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, as shown in the figure. Specifically, according to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table, special symbol A is determined when the winning symbol random number is 0 to 49, special symbol B is determined when the winning symbol random number is 50 to 74, and special symbol C is determined when the winning symbol random number is 75 to 99. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on the special 1 reserved, the probability of each jackpot symbol being determined is 50% for special symbol A, and 25% for special symbols B and C. On the other hand, according to the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table, special symbol D is determined regardless of the value of the winning symbol random number.

Figure 81 is a diagram for explaining the special electric role activation ram set table according to the embodiment. The special electric role activation ram set table according to the embodiment is used in place of the special electric role activation ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The special electric role activation ram set table stores various data for controlling the big role game, and during the big role game, the big prize opening solenoid 126c is controlled to be energized by referring to the special electric role activation ram set table. In reality, a plurality of special electric role activation ram set tables are provided for each type of special pattern (big win pattern), and the corresponding table is set at the start of the big role game according to the type of special pattern determined, but here, for convenience of explanation, the control data of the special pattern for each pattern type is shown.

As shown in FIG. 81, the big prize game consists of multiple rounds of play in which the big prize opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. According to this special electric role operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round of play begins), the maximum number of times the special electric role operates (the number of rounds of play executed during one big role play), the number of times the special electric role opens and closes (the number of times the big prize opening 126 opens during one round), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the big prize opening solenoid 126c for each opening of the big prize opening 126, i.e., the opening time of one big prize opening 126), the specified number (the maximum number of wins that can be won into the big prize opening 126 in one round of play), the effective time for closing the big prize opening (the closing time of the big prize opening 126 between rounds of play, i.e., the interval time), and the ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round of play until the normal special play (the variable display of the patterns described below) is resumed) are stored in advance as control data for each type of special pattern as shown in the figure.

When a jackpot is won by the special 1 reservation and the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed. In this big prize game, the big prize opening 126 is opened only once each in the first to fourth rounds of play. In the first to third rounds of play, the big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and in the fourth round of play, the big prize opening 126 is opened for 0.1 seconds. When a specified number of game balls enter the big prize opening 126 while it is open, or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the big prize opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the special 1 reservation and the special symbols B and C are determined as the jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed. In these big prize games, the big prize opening 126 is opened only once in the first to fourth rounds of play. In each round of play, the big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the big prize opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the special 2 reserve and the special symbol D is determined as the jackpot symbol, a jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed. In these jackpot games, the jackpot opening 126 is opened only once in the first to tenth rounds of play. In each round of play, the jackpot opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the jackpot opening 126 is closed and one round of play ends.

Figure 82 is a diagram illustrating the opening and closing of the large prize opening 126 and the opening and closing of the variable probability area 140a by the movable member 140b. In the embodiment, the fourth round of play is set as a specific round of play, and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 126 during the fourth round of play enters the variable probability area 140a, the game state after the large prize play becomes a high probability game state. As shown in Figure 82, the movable member 140b opens the variable probability area 140a for a moment (about 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the opening of the large prize opening 126 during the fourth round of play, and then maintains the variable probability area 140a in a closed state for a predetermined time, and then maintains the variable probability area 140a in an open state again.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the special symbol A is determined, the large prize opening 126 is opened for only 0.1 seconds from the start of the fourth round of play. Even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 126 during this time, it takes a certain amount of time for the game ball to reach the special prize area 140a. Therefore, when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 126 reaches the special prize area 140a, the special prize area 140a is always closed. As a result, when the special symbol A is determined and a big role game is executed, the game ball will not enter the special prize area 140a.

In addition, if an unforeseen event occurs, such as a game ball getting stuck in the big prize opening 126, or a game ball getting stuck in the big prize opening 126 for a long time for some reason, the game ball may enter the probability change area 140a even in a big role game in which special symbol A is determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, for ease of understanding, the words "always" and "certainly" are used, but this is based on the assumption that the state of the gaming machine 100 is appropriate for playing the game and that no unforeseen event has occurred, and does not mean a physical 100% probability.

In contrast, if the special patterns B, C, and D are determined and the big prize game is executed, the big prize opening 126 is opened 29.0 seconds x 1 time from the start of the fourth round of play. Therefore, it is possible that one or two game balls that enter the big prize opening 126 at the same time as the big prize opening 126 opens will not be able to enter the special prize area 140a, but game balls that enter the big prize opening 126 after that will definitely be able to enter the special prize area 140a.

Figure 83 is a diagram illustrating a game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of the big prize game according to the embodiment. The game status setting table according to the embodiment is used in place of the game status setting table according to the simultaneous spin reference example. In the embodiment, when the big prize game is executed, the game status after the end of the big prize game is set by referring to the game status setting table according to the type of special pattern (big prize pattern), whether the game ball has passed (entered) the probability change area 140a, and the game status at the time of winning the big prize.

As shown in FIG. 83, if the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the game state after the big win is set to a low probability game state, regardless of the type of special symbol. Also, if the game ball enters the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the game state after the big win is set to a high probability game state, regardless of the type of special symbol. If the game state after the big win is set to a high probability game state, the high probability number of times is set to 150. In other words, if it is set to a high probability game state, when the big win lottery is executed 150 times, the game state is changed to a low probability game state.

In addition, in the embodiment, a normal game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot related to a normal game is set in addition to the special game state (low probability game state and high probability game state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot related to a special game is specified. Here, a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state A, and a time-saving game state B are provided as normal game states. The normal game state will be described later, but below, the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are collectively referred to as the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 83, when a big win game is executed, the game state after the big win game is set to a time-saving game state, regardless of the type of special symbol and whether or not the game ball has entered the probability change area 140a. Specifically, when special symbols A, B, or C are determined, the normal game state after the big win game is set to the A time-saving game state. At this time, the number of time-saving times, which indicates the number of times the A time-saving game state continues, differs depending on the type of special symbol, whether or not the game ball has entered the probability change area 140a, the game state at the time of winning the big win, etc.

Here, the number of time-saving times is set as the number of special 2 time-saving times and the total number of time-saving times. The number of special 2 time-saving times indicates the number of times that the big role lottery will be held based on the special 2 reservation until the time-saving play state ends, and the total number of time-saving times indicates the total number of times that the big role lottery will be held based on the special 1 reservation until the time-saving play state ends and the number of times that the big role lottery will be held based on the special 2 reservation. The number shown in the number of time-saving times column in Figure 83 indicates the number of special 2 time-saving times, and the number in parentheses indicates the total number of time-saving times.

For example, if special pattern A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 100, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 104. Also, if special pattern A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a game state other than a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 183, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 187.

In addition, if special pattern A is determined and the game ball enters the special bonus area 140a during a specific round of play, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 150, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 154, regardless of the game state at the time of the big win.

In addition, if special patterns B and C are determined and the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 183, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 187, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, if special patterns B and C are determined and the game ball enters the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 150, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 154, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won.

In addition, if the special symbol D is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the normal play state after the big win is set to the A time-saving play state. At this time, regardless of the play state at the time of the big win, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state is set to 183 for the special 2 time-saving times, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 187.

On the other hand, if the special symbol D is determined and the game ball enters the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the normal play state after the big win is set to the B time-saving play state. At this time, regardless of the play state at the time of the big win, the number of time-saving times in the B time-saving play state is set to 2 for the special 2 time-saving times, and the total number of time-saving times is set to 6.

As described above, the conditions for the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state to end are that the number of major role draws based on the special 2 reserve reaches a predetermined number, and that the total number of major role draws based on the special 1 reserve and the special 2 reserve reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the total number of time-saving draws is set to four more than the number of special 2 time-saving draws.

In the gaming machine according to the embodiment, the display of the changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160 and the display of the changing patterns on the second special pattern display 162 can be executed simultaneously in parallel, as in the simultaneous spin reference example described above. Therefore, if a special 1 reservation is stored in a time-saving play state in which a lottery for a big role based on a special 2 reservation should be executed, a lottery for a big role based on a special 1 reservation will be executed. By setting the total number of time-saving times to be greater than the number of special 2 time-saving times, it becomes possible to execute a lottery for a big role based on a special 2 reservation a specified number of times in the time-saving play state, regardless of the number of special 1 reservations when transitioning to the time-saving play state.

Here, the conditions for ending the B time-saving game state further include the execution of one normal symbol variable display. Therefore, after the B time-saving game state is set, for example, when the game ball passes through gate 124, the B time-saving game state ends at that point, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state. Note that here, the B time-saving game state ends when the normal symbol variable display starts, but the B time-saving game state may end under conditions such as the normal symbol variable display ending a predetermined number of times, winning a predetermined number of times in normal play, or the normal electric winning port 123 being opened a predetermined number of times. The B time-saving game state may also end at a predetermined timing during the normal symbol variable display, at the start, end, or a predetermined timing during the normal symbol stopped display, at the start, end, or a predetermined timing during the auxiliary game.

As mentioned above, whether or not the game ball enters the probability change area 140a actually depends on the type of special pattern that specifies the opening and closing mode of the big prize opening 126 in a specific round of play. If the game is played properly, when the special pattern A is determined, the game ball will not enter the probability change area 140a during the specific round of play, and when the special patterns B, C, and D are determined, the game ball can always enter the probability change area 140a during the specific round of play. Therefore, assuming that the game is played properly, after the big role game, the game state shown in the thick line box in Figure 83 will be set. In other words, the game state other than the thick line box in Figure 83 can be said to be the game state set when an irregularity occurs. Below, the game when the game is played properly will be explained, and the game when an irregularity occurs will be omitted.

Figure 84 is a diagram illustrating a winning determination random number judgment table according to an embodiment. The winning determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment is used in place of the winning determination random number judgment table according to the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, a normal symbol judgment process is performed, which is associated with whether or not to control the flow of electricity to the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning port 123, i.e., a normal symbol lottery is performed.

When the game ball passes through the gate 124, one winning random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 99, and this random number value is stored as a regular symbol reserve in the regular symbol reserve memory area of the main RAM 300c, with a maximum of four. When the regular symbol lottery is started when the regular game state is a non-time-saving game state, a winning random number determination table for the non-time-saving game state is referenced, as shown in FIG. 84(a). According to this winning random number determination table for the non-time-saving game state, if the winning random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol, and if the winning random number is 1 to 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in a non-time-saving game state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 1/100. When a winning symbol is determined in this regular drawing, the movable piece 123b of the regular electric winning opening 123 is controlled to an open state, and when a losing symbol is determined, the movable piece 123b of the regular electric winning opening 123 is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, when starting the normal symbol lottery in the A time-saving play state, the win determination random number judgment table for the A time-saving play state is referenced, as shown in FIG. 84(b). According to this win determination random number judgment table for the A time-saving play state, if the win determination random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and if the win determination random number is 1 to 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in the A time-saving play state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 1/100.

In addition, when starting the regular symbol lottery in the B time-saving play state, the winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the B time-saving play state is referenced, as shown in FIG. 84(c). According to this winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the B time-saving play state, if the winning symbol determination random number is between 0 and 99, the winning symbol is determined as a type of regular symbol. In other words, in the B time-saving play state, the winning symbol is always determined by the regular symbol lottery.

The above winning probability in the normal drawing is merely an example. For example, even in the B time-saving play state, it may be set so that a losing symbol is determined with a predetermined probability.

85(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the embodiment, and FIG. 85(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment are used in place of the normal symbol fluctuation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the simultaneous spin reference example. According to the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the embodiment, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 seconds, when the game state is set to an A-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds, and when the game state is set to a B-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1 second. When the fluctuation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a fluctuating manner (blinking display) for the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

When the winning symbol is determined by the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is lit, the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123 is controlled to energize by referring to the opening/closing control pattern table, as shown in FIG. 85(b). Note that, in reality, an opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set when the normal electric role solenoid 123c starts to energize, depending on the game state when the normal symbol is determined.

According to the opening/closing control pattern table of the embodiment, the normal power pre-opening time (waiting time until the normal electric winning opening 123 starts to open), the normal electric role maximum opening/closing switching number (number of times the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened), the solenoid energizing time (the energizing time of the normal electric role solenoid 123c for each opening of the normal electric winning opening 123, i.e., the opening time of one normal electric winning opening 123), the prescribed number (the maximum number of wins that can be won into the normal electric winning opening 123 while the normal electric winning opening 123 is fully open), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the normal electric winning opening 123, i.e., the pause time), the normal power effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the normal electric winning opening 123), and the normal power end wait time (waiting time until the display of the normal pattern changes, which will be described later, is resumed after the normal power effective state time has elapsed) are pre-stored as control data for the normal electric winning opening 123 for each game state, as shown in the figure.

The opening and closing conditions of the normal electric winning port 123 stipulate three elements: the probability of winning the normal symbol, the time for which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the opening time of the normal electric winning port 123. In other words, by combining the three elements of the probability of winning the normal symbol, the time for which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the opening time of the normal electric winning port 123, it is possible to set the frequency of game balls entering the normal electric winning port 123 and the ratio of prize balls fired in each of the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, and the B time-saving game state. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only one example, and it is sufficient to combine the three elements so that at least the B time-saving game state is more likely to have game balls enter the normal electric winning port 123 than the non-time-saving game state or the A time-saving game state.

Figure 86 is a diagram explaining the game states according to the embodiment. As described above, in the embodiment, a special game state and a normal game state are combined to form one game state. Here, as shown in Figure 86 (a), a game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state is called a normal state, a game state combining a low probability game state and an A time-saving game state is called a low probability time-saving state, a game state combining a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and a game state combining a high probability game state and an A time-saving game state are called a probability variable state, and a game state combining a high probability game state and a B time-saving game state is called a specific state.

As described above, only the time for which the normal symbol variable display is different between the non-time-saving game state and the A-time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state and the A-time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 1/100, so almost no game balls enter the normal electric winning port 123. Therefore, the normal state, the low-probability time-saving state, and the probability variable state can be said to be game states in which the normal electric winning port 123 is almost closed. Also, here, in the probability variable state, the game progresses in the same way whether the normal game state is set to the non-time-saving game state or the A-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 100/100, so that the game ball can definitely enter the normal electric winning hole 123. However, as described above, the B time-saving game state ends when the normal symbol variable display is executed once. Strictly speaking, the B time-saving game state ends when the normal symbol variable display starts once. Therefore, when it is set to a specific state and the normal symbol variable display is executed once, the B time-saving game state immediately becomes a non-time-saving game state, and the game state transitions to a probability variable state. When the game state transitions to the probability variable state, as described above, the normal electric winning hole 123 becomes almost closed, and almost no game balls enter the normal electric winning hole 123.

The opening and closing control pattern of the normal electric winning opening 123 is determined based on the normal game state when the normal drawing is executed. Therefore, if the normal drawing is executed in the B time-saving game state and the normal drawing is won, the normal electric winning opening 123 will repeat opening for 0.16 seconds 10 times, regardless of the game state when the opening and closing control of the normal electric winning opening 123 is performed (see Figure 85).

Therefore, when the special state is set after the big win game, the auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning slot 123 is opened 10 times is executed only once, but the game state during this auxiliary game is a special state.

In addition, the change time during which the first special symbol display 160 displays the change in the symbol based on the special 1 reservation, and the change time during which the second special symbol display 162 displays the change in the symbol based on the special 2 reservation are set according to the game state as shown in FIG. 86(b). For example, in the normal state, the change time determined based on the special 1 reservation is set to 3 to 100 seconds, and the change time determined based on the special 2 reservation is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, in the normal state, the big role lottery and the change display of the symbol based on the special 1 reservation (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 change) are the actual change objects, and the big role lottery and the change display of the symbol based on the special 2 reservation (hereinafter referred to as the special 2 change) are treated as irregular. Therefore, in the normal state, the player must perform a so-called left hit to make the game ball enter the first starting hole 120, and make the game ball flow down to the first game area 116a.

In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state, the high probability state, and the specific state, the fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation is shorter than in the normal state. Since the special 2 fluctuation is more advantageous than the special 1 fluctuation, in the low-probability time-saving state, the high probability state, and the specific state, the special 2 fluctuation is the actual fluctuation target, and the special 1 fluctuation is treated as irregular. In this way, depending on the fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation and the special 2 fluctuation, as shown in the thick-line box in Figure 86 (b), in the normal state, the special 1 fluctuation is the actual fluctuation target, and in other game states, the special 2 fluctuation is the actual fluctuation target.

When the specific state (high probability game state and B time-saving game state) is set after playing a big role, it is set to the special variable period. This special variable period is a period in which a variable pattern random number judgment table is specified for each number of special 2 fluctuations after playing a big role. As described above, when a normal drawing is performed in a specific state (high probability game state and B time-saving game state), the B time-saving game state ends and the game enters a non-time-saving game state, so the game transitions to a high probability game state (high probability game state and non-time-saving game state). Therefore, when the specific state is set after playing a big role, the special variable period is set across from the specific state to the high probability game state.

The first fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation during the special fluctuation period is always determined to be 10 seconds. Also, the second fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation during the special fluctuation period is always determined to be 70 seconds if the result of the big role lottery is a miss, and is always determined to be 10 seconds if the result of the big role lottery is a jackpot. Also, for the third and subsequent special 2 fluctuations during the special fluctuation period, the same fluctuation pattern random number determination tables K and L as those in the high probability game state and A time-saving game state are selected. According to this table, if the result of the big role lottery is a miss, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 to 30 seconds, and if the result of the big role lottery is a jackpot, the fluctuation time is determined to be 30 to 50 seconds.

Next, the playability of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state according to the original playability according to the embodiment. Note that, here, the case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the normal state. In the normal state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 variable, so the player first launches the game ball toward the first game area 116a. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state is approximately 1/210, and the player continues to hit with the left hand until he wins a jackpot.

When a jackpot is won based on the special 1 reserved in normal conditions, special symbol A is determined with a 50% probability, and special symbols B and C are determined with a 25% probability each. When special symbol A is determined, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed, as shown in FIG. 87(b). However, when special symbol A is determined, the big prize opening 126 is only open for 0.1 seconds in the fourth round of play, so the number of prize balls that the player can actually win is equivalent to three rounds of play. Hereinafter, the big prize game executed when special symbol A is determined is referred to as the 4R normal big prize game.

When a game ball enters the big prize opening 126, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. Since the specified number of balls in one round of play is 10, when the specified number of game balls enter the big prize opening 126, 150 prize balls are paid out in one round of play. In the 4R regular big prize game, 450 prize balls can be won in three rounds of play.

In addition, in a 4R normal big prize game, the game ball will not enter the probability change area 140a. Therefore, the game state after the end of a 4R normal big prize game becomes a low probability time-saving state, as shown in (c) of FIG. 87. In the low probability time-saving state, since the actual change target is the special 2 change, the player performs a so-called right hit and launches the game ball toward the second game area 116b. Note that if a jackpot is won in the normal state, and the special pattern A is determined and the low probability time-saving state is set, the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 100.

In the low probability time-saving state, if a jackpot is not won within the number of times that the special 2 time-saving is activated, the time-saving period ends and the game state transitions to the normal state. In this case, the player will hit the left side again and try to win a jackpot by using the special 1 change.

On the other hand, in the normal state, if a jackpot is won based on the special 1 reserved and the special symbols B and C are determined, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is executed, as shown in FIG. 87(d). Hereinafter, the big prize game executed when the special symbols B and C are determined is referred to as a 4R special prize game. In the 4R special prize game, the big prize opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the first to fourth rounds of play. Therefore, in the 4R special prize game, 600 prize balls can be won in four rounds of play.

In addition, in the 4R special chance game, if the game is played properly, the game ball will enter the special chance area 140a in a specific round of play. Therefore, the game state after the 4R special chance game ends will be the special chance state, as shown in (e) of Figure 87. In the special chance state, since the actual variable target is the special 2 variable, the player hits to the right and launches the game ball toward the second game area 116b. Note that when the special patterns B and C are determined and the special chance state is set, the number of high probability times and the number of special 2 time reduction times are both set to 150 times.

If the player does not win a jackpot within the number of times the special 2 time-saving cycle is activated during the special jackpot state, the time-saving cycle ends and the game state transitions to normal. In this case, the player must hit the left side again, aiming to win a jackpot with a special 1 cycle.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by a special 2 variation in the low probability time-saving state or the probability variation state, the special symbol D is always determined as the jackpot symbol. When the special symbol D is determined, a big prize game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, as shown in FIG. 87(f). Hereinafter, the big prize game executed when the special symbol D is determined is called a 10R probability variation big prize game. In the 10R probability variation big prize game, the big prize opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds of play. Therefore, in the 10R probability variation big prize game, 1500 prize balls can be won in 10 rounds of play.

In addition, in the 10R special chance game, if the game is played properly, the game ball will enter the special chance area 140a in the specific round game. Therefore, the game state after the 10R special chance game ends will be a specific state, as shown in (h) of FIG. 87. In the specific state, the actual change target is the special 2 change, so the player hits to the right and launches the game ball toward the second game area 116b.

Here, when special pattern D is determined and set to the specific state, the number of high probability times is set to 150 times, and the number of special 2 time-saving times is set to 2 times. As described above, the specific state is a normal game state in which the normal game state is a time-saving B game state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving B game state are set as the total number of special 1 and special 2 fluctuations reaching 6 times, the number of special 2 fluctuations reaching 2 times, and the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed once.

Since the big prize opening 126 is located in the second game area 116b, the game balls flow down the second game area 116b even during the 10R special chance big role game. The gate 124 is located at the most upstream side of the second game area 116b, and since game balls frequently pass through the gate 124, the normal symbol reservation is stored even during the 10R special chance big role game, and the normal symbol variation display is executed. When the 10R special chance big role game ends and the specific state is set, and the normal symbol variation display starts for the first time, the specific state (B time-saving game state) ends at that point, and the game moves to the special chance state as shown in (i) of Figure 87. If the game is played properly, the game moves from the specific state to the special chance state during the first special 2 variation after the 10R special chance big role game.

As described above, the time for the first special 2 variation after a 10R special chance big role game is 10 seconds. If a normal drawing is executed and a winning ticket is won during the 10 seconds between the end of the 10R special chance big role game and the end of the first special 2 variation, a non-electric bonus period is granted, as shown in (g) of FIG. 87. In other words, the non-electric bonus period is granted based on the execution of the normal drawing during the first special 2 variation after the end of the 10R special chance big role game. This non-electric bonus period is the execution period of one auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning port 123 is opened 10 times.

When a normal lottery is executed in a specific state and a winning ticket is won, an auxiliary game is executed. The auxiliary game executed when the normal lottery is won in a specific state is composed of 10 sets of open games. In one set of open games, the normal electric winning port 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds and then maintained in a closed state for 5.0 seconds. Therefore, one set of open games takes approximately 5.16 seconds, and an auxiliary game consisting of 10 sets of open games takes more than 51.6 seconds. In addition, when an auxiliary game is executed, the opening time is set to 2.0 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.5 seconds, so the time required for the entire auxiliary game is 54.1 seconds. Therefore, the fluctuation time (70 seconds) of the second special 2 fluctuation after the big role game is longer than the time from the start to the end of the opening of the normal electric winning port 123 and the time of the entire auxiliary game.

When the player hits the ball to the right appropriately, game balls are launched into the second game area 116b at 0.6 second intervals. Almost all of the game balls launched toward the second game area 116b fall onto the movable piece 123b. As described above, game balls that fall onto the movable piece 123b roll on the movable piece 123b for about 1 to 3 seconds. Therefore, if game balls are dropped onto the movable piece 123b at 0.6 second intervals, when the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds, one or two game balls will definitely enter the normal electric winning opening 123.

All game balls that enter the normal electric winning hole 123 enter the upper second starting hole 122. When a game ball enters the upper second starting hole 122, a special 2 reservation is acquired, and the game ball that entered the second starting hole 122 transitions the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 to an open state as it falls through the game ball drop passage 144 provided on the back side of the game board 108.

The normal electric winning opening 123 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds after being opened for 0.16 seconds. Therefore, if you continue hitting the ball to the right during this time, the game ball that fell onto the closed movable piece 123b will flow further downward. The movable piece 127b of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the movable piece 129b of the second non-electric winning device 129 are located on the rolling path of the game ball that has flowed down below the movable piece 123b. And when the movable pieces 127b and 129b are in the open state, almost all of the game balls that have flowed down below the movable piece 123b will enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a (see Figure 72).

As already explained, the first non-electric winning device 127 is closed when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning port 127a, and the second non-electric winning device 129 is closed when two game balls enter the second non-electric winning port 129a.

In other words, in one set of open play, when a game ball enters the normal electric winning port 123, a total of four game balls can enter the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a. For example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a for one game ball that enters. In this case, the player can win 40 prize balls in one set of open play. As the auxiliary play is played in 10 sets of open play, the player can win an additional 400 prize balls in the non-electric bonus period immediately following the 10R special bonus game.

The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electric prize slot 127a and the second non-electric prize slot 129a is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 15 balls. In this case, the player can win 600 game balls during the non-electric bonus period, and in combination with the 10R special bonus game, the player can win more than 2000 game balls.

As mentioned above, the non-electric bonus period takes 50 seconds or more, but after the 10R special chance big role play ends, it is set to the special fluctuation period. By providing a special fluctuation period, after the 10R special chance big role play ends, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation will be 10 seconds if there is a miss, and the fluctuation time of the second special 2 fluctuation will be 70 seconds. Therefore, after the 10R special chance big role play ends, if the results of the first and second big role lottery based on the special 2 reserve are both misses, the non-electric bonus period will definitely end during the second special 2 fluctuation.

If the results of the first and second big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation are both misses, the game proceeds from the third special 2 variation in the same way as in the special 2 state shown in FIG. 87 (e). If a big win is won by the first or second big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation after the end of the 10R special big role game, the 10R special big role game is executed again. As will be described in detail later, if a big win is won by the first big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation after the end of the 10R special big role game, the second 10R special big role game and the non-electric bonus period overlap. In other words, even in this case, the player can win prize balls from the non-electric bonus period during the second 10R special big role game. Also, the non-electric bonus period is granted after the end of the second 10R special big role game.

Figure 88 is a timing chart of a 10R special bonus game and a non-electric bonus period according to an embodiment. The timing chart shown in Figure 88 shows a case where the first special 2 variation after a 10R special bonus game is a miss. When a 10R special bonus game is played, as shown in Figure 88(a), an opening period (shown as "OP" in the figure) is set, and then the large prize opening 126 is opened during the round game. Then, when the 10th round game (shown as "final R" in the figure) ends, an ending period (shown as "ED" in the figure) is set.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), during the 10R guaranteed jackpot game, the jackpot symbol is displayed stationary on the second special symbol display 162, and after the ending period ends, the first special 2 variation occurs for 10 seconds, followed by a fixed time (0.5 seconds) and then a second special 2 variation for 70 seconds.

Also, as shown in (e) of FIG. 88, at the end of the ending period, the game state is set to the B time-saving game state. Then, during the first special 2 variation and during the B time-saving game state, as shown in (c) of FIG. 88, when the normal pattern variation display starts, the B time-saving game state ends and the normal game state transitions to the non-time-saving game state. This normal pattern variation display is performed for one second, and when a winning pattern is displayed, as shown in (d) of FIG. 88, 10 sets of opening games consisting of opening and closing the normal electric winning hole 123 are repeated. Also, during each opening game, the first non-electric winning hole 127a and the second non-electric winning hole 129a are opened based on the entry of game balls into the normal electric winning hole 123, and the first non-electric winning hole 127a and the second non-electric winning hole 129a are closed by the entry of two game balls each.

Here, the gaming machine 100 outputs an external signal to a hall computer installed in the gaming center. In the gaming center, an external display device is installed for each gaming machine 100, and based on the external signal output from the gaming machine 100, the external display device displays the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, whether or not a jackpot is in progress, whether or not a winning streak is in progress, etc. The external signal includes a jackpot signal that indicates a jackpot is in progress. This jackpot signal is usually output during a big role game.

Although not shown in the figures, in the gaming machine 100, a prize ball signal is output as an external signal each time 10 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls. In the external display device, for example, by counting the number of times the prize ball signal is output while the jackpot signal is being output, the total number of prize balls paid out during one jackpot game is notified.

Here, in the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment, a non-electric bonus period is granted immediately after the end of the 10R special chance big role game. As described above, the player can win, for example, 1500 prize balls in the 10R special chance big role game, and 400 prize balls in the non-electric bonus period. If the 10R special chance big role game and the non-electric bonus period are considered to be one jackpot, the player can be notified that he or she has won 1900 game balls, which is more than the 1500 game balls that can normally be won in one big role game.

In this case, for example, the output conditions of the jackpot signal are set in advance as follows. That is, the output conditions of the jackpot signal are set during the big role game (from the start of the opening to the end of the ending), during the specific state (during the B time-saving game state), and from the start of the variable display of the normal pattern in the specific state (B time-saving game state) until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the normal electric winning port 123 is closed. This predetermined time is set so that the time until a total of four game balls enter the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a in the 10th set of open play is also included in one jackpot. Therefore, it is desirable to set the predetermined time to the time required for a total of four game balls to enter the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a. For example, if game balls are shot at 0.6 second intervals, it takes at least 0.6 seconds x 4 balls = 2.4 seconds for four game balls to be shot, so it is best to set the time to 2.4 seconds or more. When the output conditions for the jackpot signal are set in this way, the jackpot signal is output as shown in (h) of Figure 88. In this case, the jackpot signal is output from the start of the 10R special bonus game to the end of the non-electric bonus period.

For example, a non-electric bonus can be made to look like a jackpot separate from the big prize game. For example, the output conditions for the jackpot signal are set to the period during the big prize game (from the start of the opening to the end of the ending) and from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the specific state (B time-saving game state) until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed after the normal electric winning port 123 is closed. In other words, unlike the example shown in (h) of FIG. 88, the specific state (B time-saving game state) is not set as an output condition for the jackpot signal.

When the output conditions for the jackpot signal are set in this way, the jackpot signal is output as shown in the modified example in Figure 88 (i). In this case, the output of the jackpot signal is interrupted during the 10R special bonus game and during the non-electric bonus period. Therefore, the external display device counts the jackpot signal as having been output twice, resulting in a higher number of jackpots than in the example shown in Figure 88 (h).

The following describes the processing in the main control board 300 to achieve the above-mentioned gameplay. Note that, here, the processing in the main control board 300 that differs from the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example is described. Therefore, among the processing described in the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example, processing that is not described below is also executed in the same manner in the embodiment.

Figure 89 is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 89, in the timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment, a payout control management process S800 is executed instead of the payout control management process S400-25 of the simultaneous rotation reference example described above. This payout control management process S800 will be described later.

Figure 90 is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The switch management process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the switch management process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above. The switch management process according to the embodiment is the same as the switch management process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example in the processes from S500-1 to S540, but differs from the process from S500-13 onwards. Therefore, the process from S500-13 onwards will be explained here.

(S500-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the probability change area detection switch is ON, that is, whether the game ball has entered the probability change area 140a and the detection signal has been input from the probability change area detection switch 140s. If it is determined that the probability change area detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S550, and if it is determined that the probability change area detection switch is not ON, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S550)
The main CPU 300a executes a probability change area passing process for determining whether the entry of the game ball into the probability change area 140a has been properly performed.

Figure 91 is a flowchart explaining the process of passing through the variable probability area (step S550) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S550-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the probability change area valid period flag, which indicates that the entry of the game ball into the probability change area 140a is considered valid, is on. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the probability change area valid period flag is turned on at the start of the fourth round of play, and is turned off when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed after the end of the fourth round of play. If it is judged that the probability change area valid period flag is on, the process proceeds to step S550-3, and if it is judged that the probability change area valid period flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S550-5.

(Step S550-3)
The main CPU 300a turns on the probability change area passing flag and ends the probability change area passing process.

(Step S550-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error processing and ends the process of passing through the probability change area.

Figure 92 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variable number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol variable number determination process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol variable number determination process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the currently set game state and judges whether the normal game state is the time-shortened game state. If it is judged that the normal game state is the time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S612-5, and if it is judged that the normal game state is not the time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S612-21.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether it is the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162. As a result, if it is judged that it is the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162, the process proceeds to step S612-7, and if it is judged that it is not the start time of the variable display of the symbols in the second special symbol display device 162, the process proceeds to step S612-13.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of a special 2 time-saving count counter, which counts the number of special 2 time-saving counts.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special 2 time-saving cut-off counter updated in the above step S612-7 is 0. As a result, if it is judged that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S612-11, and if it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S612-13.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a resets (to 0) a total time-saving count counter that counts the total number of time-saving times.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of a total time-saving count counter that counts the total number of time-saving counts.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the total time-saving cut counter updated in step S612-13 is 0. If it is judged that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S612-17, and if it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S612-21.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a resets (to 0) the special 2 time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a turns on a zero flag, which indicates that the counter value of the special 2 time-saving number-of-times-cut counter or the total time-saving number-of-times-cut counter has been changed from 1 to 0.

(Step S612-21)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination table selection process to select and set a corresponding fluctuation pattern random number determination table based on the current game state, the reserved type, the type of the determined special pattern, etc.

(Step S612-23)
The main CPU 300a determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table set in the above step S612-21 and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S610-9 or step S610-55.

(Step S612-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in the above step S612-23 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special pattern variation number determination process.

Figure 93 is a flowchart explaining the number of times cut management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The number of times cut management process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the number of times cut management process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the zero flag is on. If it is judged that the zero flag is on, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and if it is judged that the zero flag is not on, the process ends.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal game state to a non-time-shortened game state. Although detailed explanation is omitted here, flags for the non-time-shortened game state, the A-time-shortened game state, and the B-time-shortened game state are provided as time-shortened game state flags indicating the normal game state. During play, any one of the time-shortened game state flags is on, but here, the main CPU 300a turns off the flag for the A-time-shortened game state or the B-time-shortened game state, and turns on the flag for the non-time-shortened game state.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a turns off the zero flag and ends the cut-off management process.

Figure 94 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process (step S630) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol related to the reserved type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. If it is judged that the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-5, and if it is judged that the special symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S620-23 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S630-37, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S630-7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a miss. If it is judged to be a miss, the process proceeds to step S630-29, and if it is judged not to be a miss, the process proceeds to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. If it is judged that there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S631, and if it is judged that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a forced symbol stop process.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the initial state.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets data in a special electric role activation RAM set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of times that the special electric device operates. Specifically, the data set in step S630-15 is referenced, and a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol=number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the maximum number of times that the special electric device operates. The maximum number of times that the special electric device operates indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big role game that is about to start. Meanwhile, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates, and the current number of rounds is managed by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates at the start of each round game. Here, a process for resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the counter for the number of consecutive times that the special electric device operates is also executed with the start of the big role game.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command in the transmission buffer to transmit the start of the big prize game to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H".

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a big win signal output start process for outputting a big win signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This process causes the big win signal to be output in conjunction with the start of the big win game (opening).

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state confirmation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). If it is judged that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the process for displaying the special symbol stop symbols is terminated, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the process proceeds to step S630-39.

(Step S630-39)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing object identification value, and moves the process to step S630-3.

Figure 95 is a flow chart explaining the large prize opening end wait process (S670) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The large prize opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the large prize opening end wait process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the waiting process for the end of the special prize slot, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the game status, the number of high probability times, and the number of time-saving times set in the reserve area (reserve counter) in the above step S610-29 or step S610-75.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a loads a probability change area passing flag.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the special game state based on the probability change area passing flag loaded in the above step S670-5. Here, if the probability change area passing flag is an on flag, it sets the special game state to a high probability game state, and if the probability change area passing flag is an off flag, it sets the special game state to a low probability game state.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a judges in step S670-7 whether the high probability gaming state has been set. If it is judged that the high probability gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to step S670-11, and if it is judged that the high probability gaming state has not been set, the process proceeds to step S670-13.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the high probability cut counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal game state based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the total time-saving cut-off counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the special 2 time-saving cut-off counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a judges in step S670-13 whether the time-shortened gaming state B has been set. If it is judged that the time-shortened gaming state B has been set, the process proceeds to step S670-21. If it is judged that the time-shortened gaming state B has not been set, the process proceeds to step S670-23.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal time-saving counter. The normal time-saving counter counts the number of times the normal symbols change until the B time-saving game state is ended. Here, the normal time-saving counter is set to "1".

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a executes a big win signal output stop process to stop the output of the big win signal. As a result, when the B time-saving game state is not set after the big win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped at the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-27)
The main CPU 300a sets a number command corresponding to the number of high probability times and the number of time reduction times in a transmission buffer.

(Step S670-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning slot. As a result, if the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

Figure 96 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process (S710) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol change waiting process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal symbol change waiting process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and judges whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol reserved is "0". If it is judged that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a transfers the regular reserved balls (win-determining random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the regular reserved ball storage area in blocks to the storage section with the next smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the regular reserved balls stored in the second to fourth storage sections are transferred to the first to third storage sections. The main RAM 300c is also provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the regular reserved balls stored in the 1st storage section are transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this regular pattern storage area shift process, the counter value of the regular pattern reserved ball count counter is decremented by "1," and a regular reserved reduction command indicating that the regular reserved balls have been decremented by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit, selects a winning determination random number judgment table corresponding to the current game state, performs a regular symbol lottery, and executes a regular symbol winning determination process that stores the lottery result.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. The normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a win, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is ultimately turned on. For example, in the case of a win, "0" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a checks the current game state, and selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in the above step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol variation time determined in the above step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal pattern display pattern counter in order to start the variable display of normal patterns in the normal pattern display 168. When the counter value is set to, for example, "0" in the normal pattern display pattern counter, the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned on, and when the counter value is set to "1", the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal pattern display pattern counter at the start of the variable display of normal patterns.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in a transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal symbol designation command in the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stopping symbol number determined in step S710-7 above, i.e., the symbol type (winning symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol winning judgment process.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal symbol time-saving counter is 0. If it is judged that the counter value is 0, the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S710-23.

(Step S710-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the normal time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S710-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal symbol time-saving cut counter updated in the above step S710-23 is 0. As a result, if it is judged that the counter value is 0, the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S710-27.

(Step S710-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal gaming state to a non-time-shortened gaming state, by turning off the flag for the B time-shortened gaming state and turning on the flag for the non-time-shortened gaming state.

(Step S710-29)
The main CPU 300a turns on the signal off standby flag.

(Step S710-31)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal pattern change waiting process.

Figure 97 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process (S741) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count (the number of times the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened and closed during one opening/closing control). If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit, the normal electric role opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S741-3.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and extracts solenoid control data (energization control data or energization stop control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 123c based on the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter, and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal electric closing effective time = pause time) of the normal electric role solenoid 123c.

(Step S741-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric role solenoid energization control process to start energizing the normal electric role solenoid 123c or to stop energizing the normal electric role solenoid 123c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S741-3. By executing this normal electric role solenoid energization control process, the normal electric role solenoid 123c is controlled to start or stop energizing in the above step S400-23 and step S400-25.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the normal electric winning opening 123 once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal electric role solenoid 123c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process to start energization of the normal electric role solenoid 123c has been performed in the above step S741-5. If it is judged to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S741-11, and if it is judged not to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S741-15.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S741-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal power opening designation command, which indicates the start of opening of the normal electric prize opening 123, in the transmission buffer, and terminates the normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process.

(Step S741-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal electric role solenoid 123c is in a de-energized state, that is, whether the control process to stop the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 123c has been performed in the above step S741-5. If it is judged to be in a de-energized state, the process proceeds to step S741-17, and if it is judged not to be in a de-energized state, the normal electric role winning port opening/closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S741-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal power close command, which indicates the end of opening the normal electric prize opening 123, in the transmission buffer, and ends the normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process.

Figure 98 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device prize opening end wait process (S770) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal electric device prize opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal electric device prize opening end wait process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning port end wait process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the signal off standby flag is on. If it is judged that the signal off standby flag is on, the process proceeds to step S770-5, and if it is judged that the signal off standby flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S770-9.

(Step S770-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a timer value equivalent to 5 seconds in the signal off timer. The timer value of this signal off timer is subtracted in the timer update process of S400-15. When the timer value is subtracted from 1 to 0, the big win signal is turned off in the external information management process of S400-27. As a result, when a winning symbol is determined by a normal symbol lottery executed in the B time-saving game state and an auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning hole 123 is opened is executed, the big win signal is turned off when 5 seconds have passed since the 10th opening of the normal electric winning hole 123 has ended.

(Step S770-7)
The main CPU 300a turns off the signal off standby flag.

(Step S770-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric role winning port end wait process. As a result, if a normal symbol reservation is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol will be resumed.

Figure 99 is a flowchart explaining the payout control management process (S800) in the main control board 300 in this embodiment.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether or not a payout completion command indicating the completion of payout has been received from the payout control board 310. The payout completion command is configured to be able to identify the number of paid-out game balls. If it is judged that the payout completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S800-3, and if it is judged that the payout completion command has not been received, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the payout counter. The payout counter counts 10 game balls, and the counter value is updated from 0 to 9. When the counter value is 9, the counter value is updated from 9 to 0. Here, the counter value is updated by the number of game balls indicated by the received payout completion command.

(Step S800-5)
In step S800-3, the main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the payout counter has been updated from 9 to 0. If it is determined that the counter value has been updated from 9 to 0, the process proceeds to step S800-7, and if it is determined that the counter value has not been updated from 9 to 0, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a outputs a winning signal, which is an external signal, and ends the payout control management process. For example, when the payout counter is at 9 and a payout completion command indicating that 15 balls have been paid out is received, the counter value of the payout counter is updated twice from 9 to 0 in one process. In this way, when the counter value is updated twice from 9 to 0, the winning signal is output twice. As a result, the winning signal is output every time 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Next, the effects relating to the 10R special chance big win game and the non-electric bonus period will be described. In the embodiment, the effects are executed so that the 10R special chance big win game and the non-electric bonus period appear as one big win. However, the non-electric bonus period will not be awarded unless the normal symbol change display is executed during the first special 2 change after the 10R special chance big win game. In other words, if the second special 2 change starts before the normal symbol change display is executed after the 10R special chance big win game, the normal game state will be set to the non-time-saving game state at the start of the second special 2 change.

Therefore, even if the normal symbol variation display starts after the start of the second special 2 variation, the normal symbol lottery will be executed in a non-time-saving game state. In this case, even if the winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery, the normal electric winning port 123 will only be opened once every 0.1 seconds, and the player will not be able to obtain a non-electric bonus. As described above, after a 10R special bonus game, the variation times for the first and second special 2 variations are set to 10 seconds and 70 seconds, respectively, regardless of whether a non-electric bonus period is set. If a performance similar to that when a non-electric bonus period is set is executed even though a non-electric bonus period is not set, it may cause discomfort to the player for a long period of time.

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the first special 2 variation after a 10R special chance big win game, the second 10R special chance big win game and the non-electric bonus period will overlap. In this case, it is desirable to execute a performance that enhances the sense of satisfaction. In the embodiment, the entertainment value of the game is enhanced by varying the performance depending on the result of the special 2 variation after the 10R special chance big win game and whether or not a non-electric bonus period is set.

Here, there are multiple presentation systems that are selectively executed depending on the result of the special 2 fluctuation after the 10R special bonus game and whether or not a non-electric bonus period is set. Below, six presentation systems, from the first presentation system to the sixth presentation system, are explained. In addition, each presentation system explained below is based on the premise that the game ball enters the special bonus area 140a during a specific round of play in the 10R special bonus game.

Figure 100 is a diagram explaining the first presentation system. After the end of a 10R special chance big role game, if the first special 2 variation is a miss and the display of normal symbol variations starts during this special 2 variation, a non-electric bonus period is granted spanning from the first special 2 variation to the second special 2 variation. After a 10R special chance big role game, if the first and second special 2 variations are both misses and a non-electric bonus period is granted, the presentation system becomes the first presentation system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(a), 10 rounds of play are executed in the 10R special chance game, and after the ending period has elapsed, two special 2 variations are executed. In both of these two special 2 variations, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. In addition, during the first special 2 variation, the display of the normal symbol variations is started, and after the display of the winning symbol, an opening period is passed, and an auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of opening games, is executed. This auxiliary game ends during the special 2 variation, regardless of the start timing of the display of the normal symbol variations. In addition, in FIG. 100, cross-hatching indicates that the normal electric winning opening 123 is open, and "Int." in the figure indicates an interval during which the normal electric winning opening 123 is kept closed.

In the first presentation system, during the first to ninth rounds of play in the 10R special bonus game, a round presentation set for each round is executed. Then, with the start of the tenth round, a direction indication presentation is executed to encourage the player to perform a launch operation to cause the game ball to flow down into the second game area 116b. Then, with the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, a generation presentation is executed to notify the player of the occurrence of a non-electric bonus.

After that, from the start of the first set of open play to the end of the tenth set of open play, a winning effect is executed, and from the end of the tenth set of open play to the end of the second special 2 variation, an ending effect (shown as "ED effect" in the figure) is executed. Also, from the start of the first round play in the 10R special chance big role play to the end of the tenth set of open play, a round number display effect and a total number of wins notification effect are executed in parallel with each of the above effects.

Figure 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of the first presentation system. As shown in Figure 101 (a), during the first to ninth rounds of play, a round presentation is executed in which a predetermined image (not shown) is displayed on the main presentation display unit 200a. During this time, a round number display is executed in the lower left corner of the main presentation display unit 200a to display the current number of rounds played, and a total number won notification display is executed to display the total number of game balls won by the player.

When the tenth round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 101(b), a direction indication effect is started on the main effect display unit 200a, in which a message "Aim for the right gate" and an arrow pointing to the right are displayed. This direction indication effect is executed from the start of the tenth round of play through the first Special 2 variation. When the Special 2 variation begins during the direction indication effect, as shown in FIG. 101(c), a mini symbol variation display begins in the upper right corner of the main effect display unit 200a. Here, nine types of mini symbols, each with a number from 1 to 9 written on them, are scrolled. In the following figures, the mini symbol scrolling display is indicated by an outlined arrow.

When the normal symbol variation display starts during the direction indication display, as shown in FIG. 101(d), a generation display is executed in which "Non-electric BONUS GET" is displayed on the main display unit 200a. During this generation display, when the first special 2 variation ends and the special symbol is displayed as still on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol is displayed as still, as shown in FIG. 101(e). Here, if the result of the big prize lottery is a big win, the mini symbol "7" is displayed as still, and if the result of the big prize lottery is a miss, a mini symbol other than "7" is displayed as still. Here, since the first special 2 variation is a miss, the mini symbol "2" is displayed as still.

In addition, the round number display and total number won notification effects continue to be executed even during the occurrence of the effect. However, the round number display and total number won notification effects may be interrupted during the occurrence of the effect.

After the winning symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the first set of open play begins, and the winning effect begins. In this winning effect, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and a predetermined sound is output based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electric winning hole 127a and the second non-electric winning hole 129a. Furthermore, even during this winning effect, the round number display effect and the total number won notification effect continue to be executed.

However, the round number display and total number of wins notification display have different display modes during 10R special bonus play and during the non-electric bonus period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(f), in the round number display during the non-electric bonus period, "EXTRA" is displayed above the number indicating the number of rounds played. Also, in the round number display during the non-electric bonus period, the number of open plays in the auxiliary play is added to the number of rounds played in the 10R special bonus play. Therefore, during the first set of open play, the number of rounds played is displayed as "11R" as shown in FIG. 101(f), and during the tenth set of open play, the number of rounds played is displayed as "20R" as shown in FIG. 101(g).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), the display of the number of rounds played in the round number display presentation is updated based on the entry of game balls into the normal electric winning opening 123 and the upper second starting opening 122. Therefore, if no game balls enter the normal electric winning opening 123 or the upper second starting opening 122 during one set of open play, the number of rounds played is not updated.

In this way, in the round number display presentation, during the 10R special chance big role play, the predetermined display that can identify the number of times is updated based on the opening of the big prize opening 126, and during the non-electric bonus period, the predetermined display can be updated based on the opening of the normal electric prize opening 123, and during the non-electric bonus period, the predetermined display that was last displayed during the 10R special chance big role play is updated.

In addition, in the total number of winnings notification effect during the non-electric bonus period, the total number of winnings is displayed in the center of the main effect display section 200a so that it stands out more than during the 10R special chance big role play. In the total number of winnings notification effect during the non-electric bonus period, the number of game balls won during the non-electric bonus period is added to the total number of winnings won during the 10R special chance big role play. In other words, the total number of winnings notification effect during the non-electric bonus period starts with the total number of winnings won during the 10R special chance big role play displayed. Here, during the non-electric bonus period, the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a is added to the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the big winning opening 126 during the 10R special chance big role play.

However, during the non-electric bonus period, in addition to the number of game balls paid out based on game balls entering the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a, the number of game balls paid out based on game balls entering other winning ports, such as the second start port 122 and the general winning port 118, may also be counted.

As shown in Fig. 101(f) and (g), during the second Special 2 variation, the mini symbol variation display is executed in the upper right corner of the main performance display unit 200a, as in the first Special 2 variation. Then, when the 10th set of open play ends, the ending performance is executed. In this ending performance, as shown in Fig. 101(h), the number of rounds played and the total number of wins counted from the 10R special bonus game to the non-electric bonus period are announced. This ending performance continues until the second Special 2 variation ends, and when the second Special 2 variation ends and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol is displayed as shown in Fig. 101(i).

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(j), as the third Toku 2 change begins, the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a changing manner. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, during the third and subsequent Toku 2 changes, the effect of a no-reach change pattern or a reach change pattern is executed, as in the above-mentioned effect reference example.

The non-electric bonus period is a period during which the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a are opened, allowing the player to win prize balls. However, in a 10-set open game, the first non-electric winning port 127a and the second non-electric winning port 129a will not be opened unless a game ball enters the normal electric winning port 123. In this way, in each set of open games, if a game ball does not enter the normal electric winning port 123, the following presentation is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), assume that in the first set of open play, no game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123. In this case, during the interval after the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed, an instruction effect is executed to encourage the appropriate release of the game ball. This instruction effect is executed in place of or in addition to the winning effect until a game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123.

In addition, if no game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123, the number of rounds is not updated in the round number display presentation. Therefore, for example, if no game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 during the first set of open play, and a game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 during the second set of open play, the number of rounds displayed during the second set of open play will be "11."

In addition, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 in the 10th set of opening games, the instruction performance is not executed, and the ending performance is executed. In other words, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 in the 10th set of opening games, the timing of the start of the ending performance is earlier than when the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123. The content of the ending performance is the same regardless of whether the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 in the 10th set of opening games.

Therefore, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning hole 123 during the 10th set of open play, the time from the end of the ending performance to the end of the second special 2 variation will be long. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the ending performance ends, a background performance is executed in which a specified background image is displayed.

Figure 102 is a diagram illustrating another example of the content of the first presentation system. For example, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during the first set of open play, an instruction presentation is executed in which the message "Aim to the right" and an arrow pointing to the right are displayed, as shown in Figure 102 (a). Note that, although the instruction presentation differs from the above-mentioned directional instruction presentation, a directional instruction presentation similar to the above may also be executed when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during open play.

For example, if a game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 during the second set of open play, the number of rounds is displayed as "EXTRA 11R" as shown in FIG. 102(b). Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 102(c), after the ninth set of open play is performed, no game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 during the tenth set of open play. In this case, after the normal electric winning hole 123 is closed during the tenth set of open play, an ending performance is performed as shown in FIG. 102(d). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, a background performance is performed in which a predetermined background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 102(e). Note that, although a background performance is performed here, a pseudo-variable performance, which will be described later, may be performed instead of the background performance.

Figure 103 is a diagram explaining the second presentation system. After a 10R special chance big role game, if the first and second special 2 variations are both misses and the non-electric bonus period is not granted, the presentation system becomes the second presentation system. Specifically, as shown in Figure 103, 10 rounds of play are executed in a 10R special chance big role game, and after the ending period has elapsed, two special 2 variations are executed. In both of these two special 2 variations, a miss pattern is ultimately displayed on the second special pattern display 162. Also, if the normal pattern variation display does not start during the first special 2 variation, 10 sets of open play will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

In the second presentation system, the round presentation set for each round is executed during the first to ninth rounds of the 10R special chance game, and the direction indication presentation is executed with the start of the tenth round. The direction indication presentation usually ends with the start of the normal symbol variation display, but if the normal symbol variation display does not start, the direction indication presentation continues until the start of the second special 2 variation.

Then, with the start of the second Special 2 fluctuation, an ending performance is executed. This ending performance has the same content as the first performance system described above. Then, when the ending performance ends, a mode transition performance is executed which suggests a transition to a certain probability fluctuation state, and then a pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed until the end of the second Special 2 fluctuation. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 103, since a non-electric bonus period is not granted, the round number display performance and the total number won notification performance end at the start of the second Special 2 fluctuation.

Figure 104 is a diagram explaining an example of the content of the second presentation system. As shown in Figure 104 (a), after a 10R special chance big role game, a direction indication presentation is executed during the first special 2 change, and the first special 2 change ends without the start of the normal symbol change display. In this case, with the end of the special 2 change, a mini symbol is displayed frozen in the upper right corner of the main presentation display section 200a. Then, with the start of the second special 2 change, an ending presentation is executed as shown in Figure 104 (b). Here, since a non-electric bonus period is not granted, the number of rounds played in the 10R special chance big role game and the total number of wins during the 10R special chance big role game are announced.

After the ending performance is performed for a predetermined period of time, a mode transition performance is then performed. In this mode transition performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 104(c), "Entering special probability mode" is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, suggesting a transition to a special probability state. During the ending performance and mode transition performance, a mini symbol variation display is performed, and it is announced that the second special probability 2 variation is occurring.

After the mode transition effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, a pseudo-variation effect is then executed. In this pseudo-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 104(d), the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time. Here, the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed temporarily stopped while slightly swaying. After that, as shown in FIG. 104(e), the changing display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c and the temporary stop display shown in FIG. 104(d) are repeated.

The performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as a combination of symbols with three different numbers, i.e., a losing pattern, in a provisional stop state. The performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed so as to rotate 180 degrees from the front side displayed on the main performance display unit 200a to the back side. At this time, the next provisional stop display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is displayed on the back side. In the following, the period from the start of the display of the change of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c to the end of the provisional stop display is called a pseudo-change. The time required for one pseudo-change is, for example, 1 to 2 seconds, and this pseudo-change is repeated during the pseudo-change performance.

The pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed until the second Special 2 fluctuation ends, and at the end of the Special 2 fluctuation, the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as stopped, not as a temporary stop. In this way, the second Special 2 fluctuation after a 10R special bonus game is designed to determine the fluctuation time to 70 seconds, on the premise that an effect corresponding to the non-electric bonus period is executed. When the non-electric bonus period is not granted, the timing of execution of the ending effect is advanced compared to when the non-electric bonus period is granted, and a mode transition effect is executed.

However, executing an ending effect or mode transition effect over a 70-second period can cause players to feel fatigued and distrustful. Therefore, by executing the pseudo-variation effect as described above, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special 2 variation has been performed multiple times, dispelling the fatigue and distrust.

Figure 105(a) is a diagram explaining the third presentation system, and Figure 105(b) is a diagram explaining the fourth presentation system. After a 10R special bonus game, if the first special 2 variation is a miss, the second special 2 variation is a jackpot, and a non-electric bonus period is granted, the presentation system becomes the third presentation system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105(a), 10 rounds of play are executed in the 10R special chance game, and after the ending period has elapsed, two special 2 variations are executed. In the first of these two special 2 variations, a losing symbol is finally displayed as stopped on the second special symbol display 162, and in the second special 2 variation, a winning symbol is finally displayed as stopped on the second special symbol display 162. In addition, during the first special 2 variation, the display of the normal symbol variations begins, and after the display of the winning symbol, an opening period is passed, and an auxiliary game, that is, a 10-set opening game, is executed. This auxiliary game ends during the special 2 variation, regardless of the start timing of the display of the normal symbol variations.

In the third presentation system, during the first to ninth rounds of the 10R special chance game, a round presentation set for each round is executed. Then, with the start of the tenth round, a direction indication presentation is executed, and with the start of the normal symbol variation display, a generation presentation is executed. After that, from the start of the first set of open play to the end of the tenth set of open play, a winning presentation is executed, and from the end of the tenth set of open play to the end of the second special 2 variation, a consecutive win presentation is executed. Note that, like the first presentation system, the third presentation system also executes a round number display presentation and a total win notification presentation. In other words, the third presentation system differs from the first presentation system in that a consecutive win presentation is executed instead of an ending presentation, but all other presentations are the same.

Figure 106 is a diagram explaining an example of the content of the third presentation system. As shown in Figures 106 (a) to (g), the third presentation system executes round presentation, direction indication presentation, occurrence presentation, winning presentation, round number display presentation, and total number of wins notification presentation, just like the first presentation system. Then, when the 10th set of open play ends, a consecutive win presentation is executed, as shown in Figure 106 (h). Here, in the consecutive win presentation, after "Steal the jackpot" is displayed on the main presentation display section 200a, presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c with the number 7 written on them are displayed as stopped, as shown in Figure 106 (i), and the player is notified that he or she has won the jackpot.

Here, when the second special 2 variation ends, the second 10R special chance big role game begins. During this second 10R special chance big role game, the round effect, direction indication effect, round number display effect, and total number won notification effect are executed, just like the first 10R special chance big role game. Also, even after the second 10R special chance big role game ends, a non-electric bonus period may be granted. In this way, if you win a jackpot with the second special 2 variation, the first 10R special chance big role game, the first non-electric bonus period, the second 10R special chance big role game, and the second non-electric bonus period will be consecutive.

Here, at the start of the second 10R special bonus game, the round number display shows the number of rounds played, which is the final number of rounds played during the first non-electric bonus period plus "1". Also, at the start of the second 10R special bonus game, the total number won notification shows the total number won that was displayed at the end of the first non-electric bonus period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 105(b), after playing the 10R special bonus, if the first special 2 change is a miss and the second special 2 change is a big win, and no non-electric bonus period is granted, the presentation system will become the fourth presentation system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105(b), 10 rounds of play are executed in the 10R special bonus game, and after the ending period has elapsed, two special 2 variations are executed. In the first of these two special 2 variations, a losing symbol is finally displayed as stopped on the second special symbol display 162, and in the second special 2 variation, a winning symbol is finally displayed as stopped on the second special symbol display 162. Also, if the normal symbol variation display does not start during the first special 2 variation, the 10 sets of open play will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

In the fourth presentation system, the round presentation set for each round is executed during the first to ninth rounds of the 10R special chance game, and the direction indication presentation is executed when the tenth round starts. The direction indication presentation is executed continuously until the start of the second special 2 variation.

Then, with the start of the second special 2 variation, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a mode transition performance is executed, after which a pseudo-variation performance is executed. In this pseudo-variation performance, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed stopped in a jackpot state a predetermined time before the end of the second special 2 variation, and then a role performance in which the role device 202 is activated is executed. In other words, the fourth performance system has the same performance content as the second performance system until halfway through the pseudo-variation performance.

Figure 107 is a diagram explaining an example of the content of the fourth performance system. As shown in Figures 107 (a) to (d), in the fourth performance system, direction indication performance, ending performance, mode transition performance, and pseudo-variation performance are executed in the same way as in the second performance system. Then, in the pseudo-variation performance, as shown in Figure 107 (e), in the last pseudo-variation, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed stopped in a jackpot state. After that, a specific performance role device 202 is operated from the initial position to a movable position located, for example, in front of the main performance display unit 200a, and the second special 2 variation ends after the performance role device 202 returns to the initial position.

In this way, by providing a fourth presentation system that executes the pseudo-variation presentation in the same way as the second presentation system, it is possible to notify a jackpot win even during the pseudo-variation presentation. This allows players to feel a sense of anticipation for the pseudo-variation presentation as well, reducing fatigue.

Figure 108(a) is a diagram explaining the fifth presentation system, and Figure 108(b) is a diagram explaining the sixth presentation system. After a 10R guaranteed special bonus game, if the first special 2 variation is a big win and a non-electric bonus period is granted, the presentation system becomes the fifth presentation system. Specifically, as shown in Figure 108(a), 10 rounds of play are executed in a 10R guaranteed special bonus game, and after the ending period has elapsed, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 variation, the big win symbol is finally displayed stopped on the second special symbol display 162.

During the first special 2 variation, the display of the normal symbols begins to change, and after the winning symbols are displayed, an opening period occurs, and the auxiliary game, i.e., 10 sets of open play, is executed. In this case, the auxiliary game ends during the second 10R special big role game. Here, the auxiliary game is designed to end roughly during the 3rd to 5th round play.

In the fifth presentation system, round presentations are executed during the first to ninth rounds of the first 10R special chance game, and a direction indication presentation is executed with the start of the tenth round. In addition, a second generation presentation different from the above-mentioned generation presentation is executed with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols. After that, a special presentation is executed from the start of the first round of the second 10R special chance game to the end of the ninth round.

The special effect may be executed when the first set of open play begins. Then, during the 10th round of play in the second 10R special chance game, a direction indication effect is executed, and thereafter, the effects are executed in the same manner as above. During the second 10R special chance game, a total number of wins notification effect is executed.

Figure 109 is a diagram explaining an example of the content of the fifth presentation system. As shown in Figures 109(a) to (c), in the fifth presentation system, like the first presentation system, during the first 10R special chance game, a round presentation, a direction indication presentation, a round number display presentation, and a total number won notification presentation are executed. Then, when the normal pattern variation display starts during the first special 2 variation, a second occurrence presentation is executed. Here, as shown in Figure 109(d), in the second occurrence presentation, "Festival Opening" is displayed on the main presentation display section 200a.

During the second occurrence effect, the mini symbol is displayed in a changing manner, and when the first special 2 change ends and the jackpot symbol is displayed stationary on the second special symbol display 162, a mini symbol with the number "7" written on it is displayed stationary, as shown in FIG. 109(e). Then, when the first round of play begins, a special effect is executed. In this special effect, as shown in FIG. 109(f) to (h), a special background image is displayed, and the total number of game balls acquired by the player is updated and displayed by the total acquisition number notification effect.

In this total number of winnings notification effect, the total number of winnings is continuously updated and displayed from the first 10R special chance big role game. Here, the second 10R special chance big role game and the non-electric bonus period are played simultaneously. Therefore, in the total number of winnings notification effect, the number of winning balls paid out when the game ball enters the big winning hole 126 and the number of winning balls paid out when the game ball enters the first non-electric winning hole 127a and the second non-electric winning hole 129a are counted and displayed together. Then, in the 10th round play in the second 10R special chance big role game, the direction indication effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 109(i).

Also, as shown in FIG. 108(b), if the first special 2 variation is a jackpot after a 10R special chance big role game and the non-electric bonus period is not granted, the presentation system becomes the sixth presentation system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(b), 10 rounds of play are executed in the first 10R special chance big role game, and after the ending period has elapsed, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 variation, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display 162, and the second 10R special chance big role game is executed. However, if the normal symbol variation display does not start during the first special 2 variation, the 10 sets of open play will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

In the sixth presentation system, the round presentation provided for each round is executed during the first to ninth rounds of the first 10R special chance big role game, and the direction indication presentation is executed when the tenth round game starts. The direction indication presentation is executed continuously until the end of the first special 2 variation. Then, when the second 10R special chance big role game starts, the direction indication presentation is executed again, and thereafter, the presentation is executed in the same way as the first 10R special chance big role game.

Figure 110 is a diagram explaining an example of the content of the sixth presentation system. As shown in Figures 110(a) to (c), in the sixth presentation system, like the second presentation system, a round presentation and a direction indication presentation are executed during the first 10R special chance big win game. The direction indication presentation continues during the first special 2 variation, during which the mini symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the big win symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display 162 and the second 10R special chance big win game starts, the direction indication presentation is executed as shown in Figure 110(d).

Here, the directional indication effect executed with the start of the second 10R special chance big win game has a different display content from the directional indication effect executed during the 10th round play of the first 10R special chance big win game. However, the directional indication effect executed during the 10th round play of the first 10R special chance big win game may be continued until the second 10R special chance big win game. Also, when a big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a mini symbol with the number "7" written on it is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(e), during the first round of play in the second 10R special chance big role game, a round effect, a round number display effect, and a total number of wins notification effect are executed. Here, the number of rounds played and the total number of wins are reset at the start of the second 10R special chance big role game, but the number of rounds played and the total number of wins counted during the first 10R special chance big role game may be carried over.

Next, the processing in the performance control board 330 for executing the performance related to the above-mentioned performance system will be explained. Note that, below, only the processing related to the above-mentioned performance system will be explained, and explanations of other processing and processing that is the same as the above-mentioned performance reference example will be omitted. Also, in the following explanation, the order of the actual processing may differ to make it easier to understand.

Figure 111 is a flow chart explaining the sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. The sub timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment is executed in place of the sub timer interrupt processing according to the above-mentioned reference performance example. In the embodiment, as shown in Figure 111, an additional process (S1300) is executed. This additional process will be described later.

Figure 112 is a flow chart explaining the variation pattern command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The variation pattern command reception process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the variation pattern command reception process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. Note that here, a case where the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 2 variation is received in the main control board 300 is explained, and a description of the case where the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 1 variation is omitted. Also, here, a case where a variation pattern command is received after a 10R special chance big role play is explained.

(Step S1220-1)
The sub-CPU 330a increments a fluctuation number counter that counts the number of special 2 fluctuations after a 10R special chance big role game.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the number of fluctuations updated in the above step S1220-1 is 3 or more, that is, whether it is the start of the third or subsequent special 2 fluctuations after the 10R probability variable big role game. As a result, if it is judged that the number of fluctuations is 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S1220-5, and if it is judged that the number of fluctuations is not 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S1220-7.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a normal variable performance determination process for determining an execution pattern of a normal variable performance based on the received variable pattern command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a mini symbol variation process to start varying display of the mini symbols.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the number of fluctuations updated in the above step S1220-1 is 1, that is, whether it is the start of the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R special jackpot game. If it is judged that the number of fluctuations is 1, the process proceeds to step S1220-11, and if it is judged that the number of fluctuations is not 1, the process proceeds to step S1220-15.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the result of the first special 2 variation, that is, the result of the first big role lottery, is a jackpot. If it is judged to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1220-13, and if it is judged not to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1220-29.

(Step S1220-13)
After the 10R probability variation big role game, the sub-CPU 330a turns on the consecutive win flag indicating that the result of the first special 2 variation is a big win. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the consecutive win flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R probability variation big role game.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the result of the second special 2 variation, that is, the result of the second big role lottery, is a jackpot. If it is judged to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1220-23, and if it is judged not to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1220-17.

(Step S1220-17)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the normal pattern variation flag is on. The normal pattern variation flag is turned on when the normal pattern variation display starts during the first special 2 variation after the 10R special chance big role play, which will be described in detail later. If it is judged that the normal pattern variation flag is on, the process moves to step S1220-19, and if it is judged that the normal pattern variation flag is not on, the process moves to step S1220-21.

(Step S1220-19)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a first performance system execution process for executing the performance of the first performance system. Here, a process for executing each performance constituting the above-mentioned first performance system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-21)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a second performance system execution process for executing the performance of the second performance system. Here, a process for executing each performance constituting the above-mentioned second performance system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-23)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the normal map fluctuation flag is on. If it is judged that the normal map fluctuation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1220-25. If it is judged that the normal map fluctuation flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1220-27.

(Step S1220-25)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a third performance system execution process for executing the performance of the third performance system. Here, a process for executing each performance constituting the above-mentioned third performance system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-27)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a fourth performance system execution process for executing the performance of the fourth performance system. Here, a process for executing each performance constituting the above-mentioned fourth performance system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-29)
The sub-CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the determination of each step above, and ends the variable pattern command receiving process. Based on the time table set here, in the above step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable performance on the main performance display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the performance lighting device 204, and other performance execution control are performed.

Figure 113 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol designation command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol designation command is set in step S710-19 of the normal symbol change waiting processing, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization processing.

(Step S1230-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the current game state is a specific state. If it is judged to be a specific state, the process proceeds to step S1230-3. If it is judged not to be a specific state, the normal symbol designation command receiving process is terminated.

(Step S1230-3)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on the normal game variation flag. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the normal game variation flag is turned off, for example, after the 10R special chance big role game, at the end of the second special 2 variation, or at the end of the second 10R special chance big role game.

(Step S1230-5)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the consecutive win flag is on. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1230-7. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1230-9.

(Step S1230-7)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a fifth performance system execution process for executing the performance of the fifth performance system, and ends the normal symbol designation command reception process. Here, a process is performed to execute each performance constituting the fifth performance system at a preset opportunity and timing.

(Step S1230-9)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a generating effect execution process to execute the generating effect described above, and ends the normal symbol designation command receiving process.

Figure 114 is a flowchart explaining the opening designation command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The opening designation command is set in step S630-21 of the special symbol stop symbol display processing, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization processing.

(Step S1240-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the consecutive win flag is on. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1240-3. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is not on, the opening command reception process is terminated.

(Step S1240-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the normal map change flag is on. If it is judged that the normal map change flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1240-5. If it is judged that the normal map change flag is not on, the opening designation command reception process is terminated.

(Step S1240-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a sixth performance system execution process for executing the performance of the sixth performance system, and ends the opening command reception process. Here, a process is performed for executing each performance constituting the sixth performance system at a preset opportunity and timing. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the consecutive win flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R special chance game.

Figure 115 is a flow chart explaining the process of receiving a command to specify opening the large prize opening in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The command to specify opening the large prize opening is set in step S640-5 of the process before opening the large prize opening, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1250-1)
The sub-CPU 330a updates a round number counter that counts the number of rounds.

(Step S1250-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the consecutive win flag is on. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1250-5. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1250-15.

(Step S1250-5)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the normal map fluctuation flag is on. If it is judged that the normal map fluctuation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1250-7, and if it is judged that the normal map fluctuation flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1250-15.

(Step S1250-7)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the received command to open the big prize opening and judges whether the first round of play is to start. If it is judged that the first round of play is to start, the process proceeds to step S1250-9. If it is judged that the first round of play is not to start, the process proceeds to step S1250-11.

(Step S1250-9)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a special effect execution process to execute a special effect, and ends the large prize opening opening designation command reception process.

(Step S1250-11)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the received command to open the special prize opening and judges whether it is the start of the 10th round of play. If it is judged that it is the start of the 10th round of play, the process proceeds to step S1250-13, and if it is judged that it is not the start of the 10th round of play, the process of receiving the special prize opening command is terminated.

(Step S1250-13)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a direction indication effect execution process to execute a direction indication effect, and ends the large prize opening opening designation command reception process.

(Step S1250-15)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the received command to open the big prize opening and judges whether the tenth round of play is about to start. If it is judged that the tenth round of play is about to start, the process proceeds to step S1250-17. If it is judged that the tenth round of play is not about to start, the process proceeds to step S1250-19.

(Step S1250-17)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a direction indication performance execution process for executing a direction indication performance.

(Step S1250-19)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a round performance execution process for executing a round performance according to the number of rounds played.

(Step S1250-21)
The sub-CPU 330a updates the number of rounds played displayed in the round number display effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1250-1 above, and ends the process of receiving the command to specify whether to open the large prize opening.

Figure 116 is a flow chart explaining the normal power release command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The normal power release command is set in step S741-13 of the normal electric role winning device opening/closing switching process, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1260-1)
The sub-CPU 330a increments an open game number counter that counts the number of times the normal electric winning port 123 is opened in one auxiliary game.

(Step S1260-3)
The sub-CPU 330a checks the open game counter updated in step S1260-1 and judges whether the first set of open games has started. If it is judged that the first set of open games has started, the process proceeds to step S1260-5. If it is judged that the first set of open games has not started, the process ends.

(Step S1260-5)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the consecutive win flag is on. If the consecutive win flag is on, the process ends the normal power release command reception process. If the consecutive win flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1260-7.

(Step S1260-7)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a winning performance execution process to execute a winning performance, and ends the normal power release command reception process.

Figure 117 is a flowchart explaining the normal power close command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The normal power close command is set in step S741-17 of the normal electric role winning device opening/closing switching processing, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization processing.

(Step S1270-1)
The sub-CPU 330a sets a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time in a determination timer that measures the waiting time until it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the normal electric winning hole 123. Here, the predetermined time is the time required for the gaming ball that has entered the normal electric winning hole 123 to be reliably detected by the second start hole detection switch 122s. The timer value of the determination timer is subtracted in the timer update process (S1100-5) of the sub-timer interrupt process.

(Step S1270-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the open game counter is equal to or greater than 10. As a result, if it is judged that the open game counter is equal to or greater than 10, the process proceeds to step S1270-5, and if it is judged that the open game counter is not equal to or greater than 10, the process of receiving the normal power shutoff command is terminated.

(Step S1270-5)
The sub-CPU 330a resets the open game number counter (to 0) and ends the normal power shutoff command reception process.

Figure 118 is a flowchart explaining the addition process (S1300) in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1300-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the consecutive win flag is on. If it is judged that the consecutive win flag is on, the additional process is terminated, and if it is judged that the consecutive win flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1300-3.

(Step S1300-3)
In the timer update process (S1100-5), the sub-CPU 330a determines whether the determination timer has been updated from 1 to 0. If it is determined that the determination timer has been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-5, and if it is determined that the determination timer has not been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-25.

(Step S1300-5)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a game ball has entered the normal electric winning hole 123 during the open game. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the second start hole detection switch 122s provided in the upper second start hole 122 detects a game ball, a winning command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. Then, in the sub-control board 330, when a winning command is received from the start of one set of open game until the judgment timer reaches 0, a winning flag is turned on. Here, by loading the winning flag, it is judged whether a game ball has entered the normal electric winning hole 123. If it is judged that a game ball has entered, the process moves to step S1300-7, and if it is judged that a game ball has not entered, the process moves to step S1300-15. It should be noted that if it is judged that a game ball has entered, the winning flag is turned off.

(Step S1300-7)
The sub-CPU 330a increments the round number counter. The round number counter updated here is the same as the round number counter updated in step S1250-1. That is, a common round number counter is updated at the start of a round game in the 10R probability special role game and when a game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 in one set of open game. As a result, the number of round games in the 10R probability special role game and the number of open games in which a game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 are counted together.

(Step S1300-9)
The sub-CPU 330a updates the number of rounds displayed in the round number display effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1300-7.

(Step S1300-11)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the 10th set of open games is in progress based on the counter value of the open game number counter. As a result, if it is judged that the 10th set of open games is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-13, and if it is judged that the 10th set of open games is not in progress, the additional process is terminated.

(Step S1300-13)
The sub-CPU 330a sets the ending effect waiting timer to a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time, and ends the additional process. The predetermined time is slightly longer than the interval time (5 seconds). The timer value of the ending effect waiting timer is subtracted in the timer update process (S1100-5).

(Step S1300-15)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the 10th set of open games is in progress based on the counter value of the open game number counter. If it is judged that the 10th set of open games is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-19. If it is judged that the 10th set of open games is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-17.

(Step S1300-17)
The sub-CPU 330a performs an instruction performance execution process for executing an instruction performance, and ends the additional process.

(Step S1300-19)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the second special 2 variation is a big win. If it is judged to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S1300-21. If it is judged not to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S1300-23.

(Step S1300-21)
The sub-CPU 330a performs consecutive win performance execution processing to execute consecutive win performance, and ends the additional processing.

(Step S1300-23)
The sub-CPU 330a performs processing for executing the ending effect and the background effect, and ends the additional processing.

(Step S1300-25)
In the timer update process (S1100-5), the sub-CPU 330a determines whether the ending effect waiting timer has been updated from 1 to 0. If it is determined that the ending effect waiting timer has been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-23, and if it is determined that the ending effect waiting timer has not been updated from 1 to 0, the process ends.

Next, modified examples that can be applied to the above embodiment will be described. In each of the modified examples and application examples described below, the processes in the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330, the gameplay, and the presentation content are the same as those in the above embodiment. In other words, the gaming machine 100 in the above embodiment may further include the configurations of each of the modified examples and application examples described below. In the following, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that are the same as those in the above embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 119 is a diagram explaining the configuration of the operating handle 112. As described above, the gaming machine 100 comprises an outer frame 102, a middle frame 104, and a front frame 106. The middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are provided so as to be freely opened and closed relative to the outer frame 102. The middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 can be opened and closed integrally relative to the outer frame 102. Hereinafter, the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are collectively referred to as the main body frame 107.

The operating handle 112 is provided on the main body frame 107, more precisely, on the front frame 106. The operating handle 112 has a base member 112a that protrudes from the main body frame 107 toward the player, i.e., toward the front side of the gaming machine 100. The base member 112a is configured by attaching a cover member _112a1 that covers a cylindrical tube portion to the front side of the tube portion. The cover member _112a1 is formed in a hemispherical shape.

The operating handle 112 also includes a rotating member 113 that is rotatable relative to the base member 112a. The rotating member 113 has an annular ring portion 113a provided on the outer periphery of the base member 112a. The ring portion 113a is provided with finger hooks 113b that protrude radially outward from the base member 112a. Here, the finger hooks 113b include a first finger hook _113b1 , a second finger hook _113b2 , and a third finger hook _113b3 . However, the number of finger hooks 113b is merely an example, and the rotating member 113 may include one or more finger hooks 113b.

Figure 119 shows the initial position of the rotating member 113. The rotating member 113 (operating handle 112) can rotate in a clockwise direction in the figure from the initial position shown in Figure 119. Here, the rotating member 113 can rotate from the initial position to a maximum rotation position rotated a predetermined angle in a clockwise direction. In other words, the player can operate the operating handle 112 within a predetermined angle range from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.

The first finger hook _113b1 is located at the leftmost position of the three finger hooks 113b when the rotating member 113 is in the initial position. The third finger hook _113b3 is located at the rightmost position of the three finger hooks 113b when the rotating member 113 is in the initial position. The second finger hook _113b2 is located between the first finger hook _113b1 and the third finger hook _113b3 . These three finger hooks 113b are provided spaced apart from one another in the circumferential direction.

As an example, a player may rotate the rotating member 113 by placing the thumb of his/her right hand on the left side of the first finger rest 113b- ₁ and the middle and ring fingers of his/her right hand between the second finger rest 113b _- 2 and the third finger rest 113b- ₃ .

FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the dimensional relationship of the operating handle 112. The part of the finger hook 113b located at the outermost radial direction is defined as the maximum protruding part. The length from the rotation center axis O of the operating handle 112 to the maximum protruding part of the first finger hook _113b1 is defined as distance L1, the length from the rotation center axis O to the maximum protruding part of the second finger hook _113b2 is defined as distance L2, and the length from the rotation center axis O to the maximum protruding part of the third finger hook _113b3 is defined as distance L3. Here, the dimensional relationship is such that the distance L1 is greater than the distance L2, and the distance L2 is greater than the distance L3. Note that, in the initial position of the rotating member 113, all of the three finger hooks 113b are located above the rotation center axis O.

The portion of the rotating member 113 where the finger hook portion 113b is not provided is semicircular with the rotation axis O as the center of curvature, and the radius of the rotating member 113, i.e., the distance L4 from the rotation axis O to the rotating member 113, is smaller than the distance L3.

The vertically downward edge of the main body frame 107 is the lower edge 107a, and the right edge of the main body frame 107 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100 is the side edge 107b. The length from the rotation center axis O of the operating handle 112 to the lower edge 107a is distance L5, and the length from the rotation center axis O of the operating handle 112 to the side edge 107b is distance L6. Here, distance L6 is greater than distance L5, and both distances L5 and L6 are greater than distance L4.

Therefore, in the initial position of the rotating member 113, the entire operating handle 112 is within the range of the main body frame 107. In other words, since the finger hook 113b is located above the central axis of rotation O, in the initial position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook 113b does not protrude downward beyond the lower edge 107a. Furthermore, in the initial position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook 113b does not protrude to the right of the side edge 107b, in other words, beyond the range of the main body frame 107 in the width direction of the main body frame 107.

Figure 121 is a diagram illustrating the maximum rotation position of the operating handle 112. As described above, the rotating member 113 can rotate within a range from the initial position to the maximum rotation position, and at the maximum rotation position, further clockwise rotation is restricted by a stopper mechanism (not shown). In other words, the rotating member 113 cannot rotate further clockwise than the maximum rotation position shown in Figure 121.

At the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the entire operating handle 112 is within the range of the main body frame 107. More specifically, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the third finger hook portion _113b3 is located at the lowest position among the three finger hook portions 113b. At this time, the third finger hook portion _113b3 does not protrude downward beyond the lower edge 107a. In other words, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook portion 113b does not protrude downward beyond the lower edge 107a.

Furthermore, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the second finger hook portion _113b2 is located at the rightmost position among the three finger hook portions 113b. At this time, the second finger hook portion _113b2 does not protrude to the right beyond the side edge 107b. In other words, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook portion 113b does not protrude to the right beyond the side edge 107b.

Furthermore, the maximum protruding portion of the first finger hook _113b1, which has the maximum protruding amount, does not reach the lowest position within the range of the rotation trajectory of the rotating member 113. In particular, here, the maximum protruding portion of the first finger hook 113b1 is always located above the rotation center axis O.

As described above, according to the first modified example, no matter what state the operating handle 112 is in, the finger hook 113b and all parts of the operating handle 112 do not protrude outside the main body frame 107 from the lower edge 107a and the side edge 107b. As a result, even if the main body frame 107 is placed on a ground surface such as a floor, the finger hook 113b does not come into contact with the ground surface, reducing the risk of damage to the operating handle 112.

In addition, in the gameplay of the above embodiment, the operating angle of the operating handle 112 is changed depending on the game state, and the game ball is required to be hit in a different direction. At this time, if the finger grip portion 113b protrudes downward from the lower edge 107a, the player's hand holding the operating handle 112 may come into contact with the ground surface, etc., and operability may be reduced. If operability is reduced, the player may not be able to shoot the game ball at the intended location, which may cause a disadvantage.

As described above, because the finger grip 113b does not protrude below the lower edge 107a, the player's hand is less likely to come into contact with the ground, and a decrease in operability can be suppressed. This makes it easier for the player to launch the game ball at the desired location, and reduces disadvantages to the player.

In this embodiment, the operating handle 112 is provided on the front frame 106, but the operating handle 112 may be provided on the middle frame 104. In this case, a notch may be provided in the front frame 106 at a position opposite the operating handle 112 so that the operating handle 112 protrudes forward from the front frame 106.

As described above, the main body frame 107 includes the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106, but the dimensions of the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are slightly different. In the first modified example, the above distances L5 and L6 are based on the middle frame 104 or the front frame 106, whichever is located relatively outward. However, the above distances L5 and L6 may also be based on the middle frame 104 or the front frame 106, whichever is located relatively inward.

Fig. 122 is a diagram for explaining a first application example of the operating handle 112, and Fig. 123 is a diagram for explaining a second application example of the operating handle 112. Figs. 122 and 123 show the torque according to the operating angle of the operating handle 112. In Fig. 122, the legend shown with a dashed line shows a comparative example which is the torque of a general operating handle 112, and the legend shown with a solid line shows the torque of the operating handle 112 according to the first application example. In Fig. 123, the legend shown with a dashed line shows the same comparative example as Fig. 122, and the legend shown with a solid line shows the torque of the operating handle 112 according to the second application example.

In addition, in Figures 122 and 123, "initial movement" indicates the start of the rotation operation of the operating handle 112, that is, the state in which the operating angle of the operating handle 112 is 0 degrees. Also, "left hit reference position" indicates the operating angle of the operating handle 112 at which the released game ball reaches the game area 116 with the minimum strength. Also, "right hit reference position" indicates the maximum operating angle of the operating handle 112, that is, the full stroke state.

The horizontal axis in Figures 122 and 123 can also be said to represent the operating angle of the operating handle 112, with the operating angle increasing further to the right of the graph. Therefore, if the operating angle is between the "initial movement" and the "left-hit reference position", the game ball will not reach the game area 116. Also, if the operating angle is less than a specified angle (specified amount of rotational operation) between the "left-hit reference position" and the "right-hit reference position", the game ball will flow down the first game area 116a, and if the operating angle is equal to or greater than the specified angle (specified amount of rotational operation), the game ball will flow down the second game area 116b.

As shown in Figures 122 and 123, in the comparative example, the torque at the "initial movement" is 31N, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is 69N, and the torque at the "right-handed reference position" is 152N. In contrast, in the first application example, the torque at the "initial movement" is 6.8N, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is 13.6N, and the torque at the "right-handed reference position" is 23.8N. Also, in the second application example, the torque at the "initial movement" is 27.2N, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is 54.4N, and the torque at the "right-handed reference position" is 95.2N.

In the following, the torque at the "initial movement" is called the first operation torque, the torque at the "left-hand hit reference position" is called the second operation torque, and the torque at the "right-hand hit reference position" is called the third operation torque. In both the first and second application examples, the relationship first operation torque < second operation torque < third operation torque holds.

In the comparative example, the third operation torque is more than twice the second operation torque. Therefore, for example, when changing the flow position of the game ball from the first game area 116a to the second game area 116b, the torque increases rapidly. Therefore, in the comparative example, if the game state, etc., is frequently changed, the player may become tired of the operation. Also, for example, when changing the flow position of the game ball from the second game area 116b to the first game area 116a, it may be difficult to adjust to an appropriate operation angle, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

In contrast, in the first and second application examples, the third operation torque is less than twice the second operation torque. In this way, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, the operation torque does not increase suddenly from the left hit reference position to the maximum rotation position, and the player feels that the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced. In addition, for example, when changing the flow position of the game ball from the second game area 116b to the first game area 116a, it becomes easy to adjust to an appropriate operation angle, and disadvantages caused to the player are reduced.

The operation angle from the "initial movement" to the "left-hand hit reference position" is the first operation angle, and the operation angle from the "initial movement" to the "right-hand hit reference position" is the second operation angle. In this case, the first operation angle and the second operation angle can be designed as appropriate, but for example, the first operation angle can be set to 45° to 60°, the second operation angle can be set to 100° to 120°, and the first operation angle (e.g., 45°) can be set to half or less of the second operation angle (e.g., 100°).

In addition, although there are no particular limitations on the method for setting the torque, the operating handle 112 is provided with an elastic member for returning the operating angle to the initial position, and the torque can be easily set by setting the spring constant of this elastic member.

As described above, by applying the first or second application example to the above embodiment and various modified examples, the operability of the player is improved, and appropriate play in accordance with the gameplay is possible.

Figure 124 is a diagram illustrating a game board 108x according to a second modified example. In the second modified example, the processing in the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330, as well as the gameplay, are the same as in the above embodiment.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, the configuration of the game board 108x is different from that of the above embodiment, and the other configurations are the same as those of the above embodiment unless otherwise specified. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those of the above embodiment, and illustrations and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The game board 108x shown in FIG. 124 is held by the middle frame 104, as in the above embodiment. The game board 108x includes an outer rail 500, a rail base 502, and a decorative plate 503. The outer rail 500 is provided on the front of the game board 108x. The outer rail 500 is made of a thin metal plate member, and stands vertically on the front of the game board 108x near the periphery of the game board 108x, as with the rail 114a in the above embodiment. Specifically, the outer rail 500 extends from the bottom of the game board 108x toward the upper left, and extends from near the left side of the game board 108x, above the game board 108 and near the center in the width direction, toward the right side of the game board 108x.

The outer rail 500 is gently curved overall, and the launched game ball is guided by the outer rail 500 to the play area 116. A through hole 108a is formed in the game board 108, and an inner member 402 that stands up on the front side of the game board 108 is provided at the top of this through hole 108a. This inner member 402 is attached to the game board 108, and prevents the game ball from falling out of the through hole 108a.

The play area 116 is a space on the play board 108x that is surrounded by the decorative plate 503, the transparent plate 110, the outer rail 500, and the inner member 402, and is an area in which the play balls can flow down or roll. The play board 108x is provided with numerous nails and windmills, and the play balls guided to the play area 116 collide with the nails and windmills, causing them to flow down and roll in irregular directions.

The play area 116 has a first play area 116a and a second play area 116b, which have different degrees of entry of game balls depending on the launch strength of the launch mechanism. The first play area 116a is located on the left side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second play area 116b is located on the right side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100. Therefore, game balls launched by the launch mechanism with a launch strength less than a predetermined strength will enter the first play area 116a, and game balls launched with a launch strength equal to or greater than the predetermined strength will enter the second play area 116b.

Although not shown, the second modified example also has the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the gate 124, the first large winning opening 126, the second large winning opening 128, the discharge opening 130, and the rail 114b. The second modified example also has the first starting opening 120 and the rail 114b provided in the first play area 116a, and the second starting opening 122, the gate 124, the first large winning opening 126, and the second large winning opening 128 provided in the second play area 116b.

In the second modified example, the second starting opening 122 is also configured as a variable starting opening that can be switched between an open state and a closed state. In a normal game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the gate 124, when a winning symbol is selected, an opening/closing game is executed in which the second starting opening 122 is opened or closed. As a result, the second modified example achieves the same gameplay as the above embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 124, the game board 108x is equipped with a resin rail base 502. The outer rail 500 is attached to the rail base 502. The rail base 502 to which the outer rail 500 is attached is then attached to a decorative plate 503, thereby forming the game board 108x.

Figure 125 shows the outer rail 500 before it is attached to the rail base 502. As shown in Figure 125 (a), the outer rail 500 has guide portions 504 formed at intervals, which are holes that penetrate the outer rail 500 and guide the attachment position of the outer rail 500 to the game board 108x. As will be described in more detail later, the guide portions 504 are not formed at equal intervals on the outer rail 500.

The outer rail 500 has a start end bend 506b at its start end 506a. The outer rail 500 has a end end bend 508b at its end end 508a. The outer rail 500 also has two holes 505 that pass through it, in addition to the guide section 504, and are used when processing the outer rail 500.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), one of the holes 505 is provided between the terminal end 508a and the guide portion 504 provided closest to the terminal end 508a. Also, one of the holes 505 is provided between the guide portion 504 closest to the starting end 506a and the guide portion 504 second closest to the starting end 506a.

Also, as shown in FIG. 125(a), each guide portion 504 is positioned offset to one side from the center in the width direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the outer rail 500.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the terminal bend 508b at the terminal end 508a of the outer rail 500 is generally U-shaped, and the starting end bend 506b at the starting end 506a of the outer rail 500 is generally L-shaped.

Figure 126 shows an oblique view of the game board 108x, outer rail 500, and rail base 502 in a disassembled state according to the second modified example. As shown in Figure 126, the rail base 502 is provided with protrusions 510 at a predetermined interval to be inserted into the guide portion 504 of the outer rail 500. In other words, the protrusions 510 are provided at the same intervals and in the same number as the guide portions 504.

The starting end support portion 512b is formed at the starting end 512a of the rail base 502 to support the starting end bent portion 506b of the outer rail 500. The starting end support portion 512b has a hole into which the starting end bent portion 506b can be inserted. By inserting the starting end bent portion 506b into the starting end support portion 512b, the starting end bent portion 506b is supported by the starting end support portion 512b.

In addition, an end support portion 514b for supporting the end bent portion 508b of the outer rail 500 is formed at the end portion 514a of the rail base 502. The end support portion 514b is provided with a protrusion (not shown) for hooking the approximately U-shaped portion of the end bent portion 508b. By hooking the approximately U-shaped portion of the end bent portion 508b onto this protrusion, the end support portion 514b supports the end bent portion 508b.

When attaching the outer rail 500 to the rail base 502, first, as described above, attach the end bent portion 508b of the outer rail 500 to the end support portion 514b of the rail base 502.

Next, each protrusion 510 of the rail base 502 is inserted into each guide portion 504 of the outer rail 500, and the start end bent portion 506b of the outer rail 500 is inserted into the start end support portion 512b of the rail base 502.

At this time, the outer rail 500 is deformed along the guide surface 516 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rail base 502. This deformation generates a force that causes the outer rail 500 to return to its original shape due to elastic deformation. This elastic deformation force presses the outer rail 500 against the guide surface 516. This elastic deformation force is strong enough that the outer rail 500 does not come off the rail base 502 due to vibration caused by an external force.

Figure 127 is a diagram showing cross section A in Figure 124 for a game board 108x relating to the second modified example. As shown in Figure 127, the guide surface 516 is inclined so as to cover the game ball launched along the outer rail 500. In cross section A, the guide surface 516 is inclined toward the right side of the game machine 100. This prevents the game ball from flying out to the front side (player side) of the game machine 100 and colliding with the transparent plate 110.

In addition, the guide portion 504 and the protrusion portion 510 inserted into the guide portion 504 are provided so as not to come into contact with the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, the guide portion 504 and the guide portion 504 are provided so as to be positioned between the surface of the decorative board 503 and the center of the game ball that comes into contact with the decorative board 503. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the guide portion 504 or the protrusion portion 510 and being bounced off.

Figure 128 is a diagram for explaining the position of the guide portion 504 when the outer rail 500 according to the second modified example is attached to the game board 108x. Note that the rail base 502 is omitted from Figure 128 for ease of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 128, three guide sections 504 are provided in a first range H1, which is the range from the starting end P1, which is the end at the starting end 506a of the outer rail 500, to the left end P2, which is the leftmost end of the outer rail 500. Two guide sections 504 are provided in a range H2, which is the range from the left end P2 of the outer rail 500 to the upper end P3, which is the uppermost end of the outer rail 500. No guide section 504 is provided in a third range H3, which is the range from the upper end P3 to the terminal end P4, which is the end at the terminal end 508a of the outer rail 500.

In other words, the number of guide portions 504 provided on the outer rail 500 is greater in the first range H1 than in the second range H2, and greater in the second range H2 than in the third range H3.

This allows the number of guide sections 504 to be increased on the game ball launcher side, which is subject to greater impact from the game balls and requires particularly accurate positioning of the outer rail 500, making it possible to reliably suppress misalignment and vibration of the outer rail 500 on the game ball launcher side.

In addition, since the speed of the game ball is reduced compared to immediately after it is launched from the game ball launching device, the impact from the game ball is small, and the number of guide parts 504 on the terminal P4 side, which has less impact on the game, can be reduced, making it easier to process the outer rail 500 and attach it to the rail base 502.

In addition, the same effect as above can be obtained by making the number of guide parts 504 provided in the first range H1 of the outer rail 500 equal to or greater than the number of guide parts 504 provided in the second range H2, and by making the number of guide parts 504 provided in the second range H2 equal to or greater than the number of guide parts 504 provided in the third range H3.

In addition, the same effect as above can be obtained by making the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 of the outer rail 500 equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3, and making the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2 equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3.

In addition, the same effect as above can be obtained by making the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 of the outer rail 500 equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2, and by making the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3.

As described above, three guide sections 504 are provided in the first range H1, which is the range from the start P1 of the outer rail 500 to the left end P2 of the outer rail 500. Two guide sections 504 are provided in the fourth range H4, which is the range from the left end P2 of the outer rail 500 to the end P4 of the outer rail 500. In other words, the same effect as above can be obtained by making the number of guide sections 504 provided in the first range H1 in the outer rail 500 greater than the number of guide sections 504 provided in the fourth range H4.

As described above, five guide sections 504 are provided in the fifth range H5, which is the range from the start P1 of the outer rail 500 to the top end P3 of the outer rail 500. Furthermore, no guide section 504 is provided in the third range H3, which is the range from the top end P3 of the outer rail 500 to the end P4 of the outer rail 500. In other words, the same effect as above can be obtained by making the number of guide sections 504 provided in the fifth range H5 in the outer rail 500 greater than the number of guide sections 504 provided in the third range H3.

As described above, four guide sections 504 are provided in the sixth range H6, which is the range from the start P1 of the outer rail 500 to the middle P5, which is the center of the entire length of the outer rail 500. One guide section 504 is provided in the seventh range H7, which is the range from the middle P5 of the outer rail 500 to the end P4 of the outer rail 500. In other words, by making the number of guide sections 504 provided in the sixth range H6 in the outer rail 500 greater than the number of guide sections 504 provided in the seventh range H7, the same effect as above can be obtained.

As described above, in the second modified example, by inserting the protrusion 510 provided on the rail base 502 into the guide portion 504 provided on the outer rail 500, it is not necessary to fix the outer rail 500 to the rail base 502 with screws. Therefore, compared to fixing the outer rail 500 to the rail base 502 with screws, the number of parts can be reduced, and costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when removing the outer rail 500 for replacement, the process of removing the screws is not required, and it can be easily removed with few labor hours.

In addition, since the guide portion 504 is a hole that penetrates the outer rail 500 as described above, if the guide portion 504 is formed at the apex, there is a risk that unintended deformation will occur in the outer rail 500 at the apex. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide portion 504 is not formed at the left end (left apex) P2 and the upper end (upper apex) P3. This makes it possible to suppress the risk of unintended deformation occurring in the outer rail 500 at the apex (left end P2, upper end P3). In addition, since the guide portion 504 is not formed at the left end (left apex) P2 and the upper end (upper apex) P3, which are likely to come into contact with the game ball, it is possible to reliably suppress the deviation and vibration of the outer rail 500. This makes it possible to suppress the risk of the game being interrupted due to deviation and vibration of the outer rail caused by the game ball coming into contact with the outer rail, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above second modified example, the guide portion 504 and the protrusion portion 510 inserted into the guide portion 504 are positioned between the surface of the decorative plate 503 and the center of the game ball that contacts the decorative plate 503 so as not to come into contact with the game ball. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the guide portion 504 and the guide portion 504 may be positioned in front of the gaming machine 100 relative to the center of the game ball that contacts the decorative plate 503.

If the outer rail 500 on the game ball launching device, which receives a large impact from the game ball and requires particularly accurate positioning, is not installed accurately, the outer rail 500 will vibrate, which may significantly change the behavior of the game ball and cause disadvantages to the player. Therefore, by applying the second modified example described above in addition to the playability of the above embodiment, it is possible to reduce disadvantages to the player.

Although the preferred embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the attached drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modified or revised examples within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these also naturally fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the case of a so-called simultaneous spinning machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to so-called first type gaming machines, second type gaming machines, and first and second type mixed machines.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which a game state was provided by combining a high probability game state and a low probability game state with a time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state, but the game state is not limited to this. In any case, it is sufficient that at least a start port including a variable start port is provided in the game area, and a normal state and a specific state in which it is easier to insert a game ball into the variable start port than in the normal state are provided as game states.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which a big prize game in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times is executed as an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. However, the specific content of the advantageous game is not particularly limited as long as the game proceeds in a way that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

In the above embodiment, the normal game states are the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, and the B time-saving game state, but it is sufficient to provide at least one state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the variable start port than in the non-time-saving game state. The A time-saving game state may be set so that a winning combination is not possible. Furthermore, in normal game play, the execution or non-execution of the auxiliary game may be determined according to the game state without a normal drawing. For example, it may be set in advance so that when the game ball passes through the gate 124 in the B time-saving game state, the auxiliary game is executed without obtaining a random number, and in other normal game states, the auxiliary game is not executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state A. However, for a specified jackpot pattern, the normal game state may be set to the time-saving game state B even if the game ball does not enter the probability change area 140a. For example, if the special pattern D is determined, the normal game state may be set to the time-saving game state B regardless of whether the game ball enters the probability change area 140a.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by setting the second change time in the specific state to a long time, it is possible to change the game state from the specific state to another game state after the result of the normal drawing in the specific state is derived and before the normal electric winning opening 123 starts to open. However, for example, the first or third or subsequent change time in the specific state may be set to be longer than the time from the start to the end of the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123. In this way, by setting the change time for the specified number of times after the end of the big role game longer than the time from the start to the end of the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123, it is possible to change the game state from the specific state to another game state before the normal electric winning opening 123 starts to open.

Also, for example, the time (when hitting a jackpot or losing) of the first special 2 change in the B time-saving game state may be set to be longer than the time from the start of the normal symbol change display to the start of the opening of the normal electric winning port 123. In this case, if the first special 2 change in the B time-saving game state is a jackpot, it is possible to notify the winning of the jackpot before the non-electric bonus. In this case, the non-electric bonus does not hinder the winning notification of the jackpot, and it is effective when the winning notification of the jackpot with a larger profit is prioritized. In addition, according to the above setting, since the special 2 change can be executed at least twice before the start of the non-electric bonus, the normal game state at the start of the non-electric bonus can be made into a non-time-saving game state even if the end condition of the B time-saving game state does not include the change display of the normal symbol. This makes it possible to prevent the base during the time-saving game state from becoming too high due to the non-electric bonus, as in the above embodiment.

Also, for example, the time (at the time of a big win or a miss) of the first special 2 change in the B time-saving game state may be set longer than the time from the start of the normal pattern change display in the non-time-saving game state to the end of the opening of the normal electric winning port 123. If the time from the start of the normal pattern change display in the non-time-saving game state to the start of the opening of the normal electric winning port 123 is longer than the time of the first special 2 change in the B time-saving game state, when the normal pattern lottery is won just before the end of the big role game, the change display of the next normal pattern may not start during the B time-saving game state, and the change display of the next normal pattern may start after the special 2 change starts twice and the B time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state. In this case, the change display of the normal pattern does not start in the B time-saving game state, so it becomes impossible to acquire a non-electric bonus. As described above, by setting the time for the first special 2 variation in the B time-saving play state (when there is a big win or a miss) to be longer than the time from when the normal symbol variation display starts in the non-time-saving play state to when the normal electric winning port 123 starts opening, it is possible to start the normal symbol variation display during the B time-saving play state.

In addition, by changing the game state from a specific state to another game state before the normal electric winning opening 123 begins to open, the number of game balls in the specific state does not increase.

It goes without saying that the above examples are merely examples and can be modified as appropriate.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a simultaneous spinning machine was described, but it can also be a machine that consumes the winning jackpot in order of winning, or a machine that consumes the special 2 jackpot in priority order, or a machine that consumes the special 1 jackpot in priority order.

In the above embodiment, six levels of setting values are provided, but setting values do not have to be provided, and the number of setting values is not particularly limited. In the above embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on the setting value. However, this is not the only thing that differs depending on the setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as areas into which game balls can be hit. However, the surface configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

The special symbol winning determination process corresponds to the winning/losing determination of the present invention, and the main CPU 300a that executes the special symbol winning determination process corresponds to the determination means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a which executes the special symbol stop symbol display process to the large prize opening closing validity process corresponds to the advantageous game execution means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a which executes the large prize opening end wait process corresponds to the state setting means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a which executes the normal electric role winning hole closing validity processing from the normal symbol stop symbol display processing corresponds to the opening/closing control means of the present invention.
In addition, the first non-electric prize slot 127a and the second non-electric prize slot 129a correspond to the prize slots of the present invention.
Furthermore, the dispensing control board 310 corresponds to the dispensing control means of the present invention.
Moreover, the main CPU 300a which executes the process of step S400-27 corresponds to the signal output means of the present invention.

100 Gaming machine 122 Second start port 127a First non-electric winning port 129a Second non-electric winning port 300 Main control board 300a Main CPU
300b Main ROM
300c Main RAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a starting hole including at least a variable starting hole is provided in a gaming area, and a normal state and a specific state in which a gaming ball is easier to enter the variable starting hole than in the normal state are provided as gaming states,
A determination means for determining whether or not a game has been won based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole;
an advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game advantageous to a player based on the result of the win/loss judgment;
A state setting means for setting the game state after the advantageous game to the specific state;
An opening/closing control means for controlling the opening/closing of the variable starting port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the specific state;
A winning hole that is provided in the game area so as to be able to open and close and that can be opened by a game ball that has entered the variable start hole;
A payout control means for paying out prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the winning hole;
a signal output means for outputting a big win signal to the outside during the advantageous game and during the opening of the winning hole after the advantageous game is ended;
A gaming machine equipped with:

Images